2007 saturn sky owner manual m - general motorshow to use this manual many people read the owner...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Safety Belts ............................................ 12Child Restraints ...................................... 28Airbag System ........................................ 43Restraint System Check ......................... 56

Features and Controls ................................ 59Keys ....................................................... 60Doors and Locks .................................... 66Windows ................................................ 71Theft-Deterrent Systems ......................... 73Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 77Mirrors .................................................... 93

OnStar® System ..................................... 94Storage Areas ........................................ 99Convertible Top .................................... 100

Instrument Panel ....................................... 105Instrument Panel Overview ................... 108Climate Controls ................................... 122Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 127Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 144Audio System(s) ................................... 158

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 191Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 192Towing ................................................. 230

2007 Saturn SKY Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 231Service ................................................. 233Fuel ...................................................... 235Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 240Rear Axle ............................................. 278Headlamp Aiming ................................. 278Bulb Replacement ................................ 279Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 283Tires ..................................................... 284Appearance Care .................................. 315Vehicle Identification ............................. 324Electrical System .................................. 325Capacities and Specifications ................ 331

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 333Maintenance Schedule .......................... 334

Customer Assistance Information ............. 353Customer Assistance and Information ... 354Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 368

Index .......................................................... 371

2

SATURN and the SATURN Emblem areregistered trademarks of Saturn Corporation.GENERAL MOTORS and GM are registeredtrademarks and the name SKY is a trademarkof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest informationat the time it was printed. We reserve theright to make changes after that time withoutfurther notice.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15908067 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Seatback Latches ........................................ 12

Safety Belts .................................................. 12Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 12Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 17How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 18Driver Position ............................................. 18Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 26Passenger Position ...................................... 27Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 27Safety Belt Extender ................................... 27

Child Restraints ............................................ 28Older Children ............................................. 28Infants and Young Children ......................... 30Child Restraint Systems .............................. 34

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) .................................... 38

Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat Position .......................... 38

Airbag System .............................................. 43Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 45When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 47What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 48How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 48What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 48Passenger Sensing System ......................... 50Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 54Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 55Restraint System Check ............................... 56

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 56Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 57

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the lever locatedunder the front of theseat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe lever. Try to move the seat with your body tobe sure the seat is locked in place.

Make sure nothing is in front of or under the seatto prevent it from releasing or re-locking afteradjustment.

8

Driver Seat Height AdjusterYour vehicle may have a power driver’s seatheight adjuster.

The switch is located on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat. To use the adjuster, first movethe seat to where you want it. See Manual Seatson page 8. To raise or lower the seat, hold theswitch up or down.

9

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seatback, turn the knob on theoutboard side of the seatback until the seatbackis in the desired position.

10

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

11

Seatback LatchesThe seats have a latchlocated on the outboardside near the top ofthe seatback thatenables the frontseatback(s) to foldforward.

This allows access to the map pocket on the rearof the seatback.To fold the seatback forward, lift the latch andpush the seatback forward.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecan not wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be if you are buckledup. Always fasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger’s belt isfastened properly too.

12

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seatand using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passenger to buckle your safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 129and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Lighton page 130.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

13

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

14

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

15

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

16

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down.And your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why shouldI have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passenger can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

17

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 28 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 30. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

18

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 27.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

19

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strongpelvic bones. And you would be less likely toslide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

20

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

21


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

22


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

23


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

24


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourretailer to fix it.

25

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

26

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the passenger’s safety beltproperly, see Driver Position on page 18.

The passenger’s safety belt works the same wayas the driver’s safety belt — except for onething. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of thebelt out all the way, you will engage the childrestraint locking feature. If this happens, just letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 57.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wearit, just attach it to the regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

27

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs.It should never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

28

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of thevehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crashthe child’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.

29

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the beltin this way, in a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bonesin a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

30

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, theyneed to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

31

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates canbe seriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants needthe protection that a child restraintsystem can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchasedby the vehicle’s owner, are available infour basic types. Selection of a particularrestraint should take into considerationnot only the child’s weight, height, and agebut also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in whichit will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

32

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

33

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

34

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

35

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt,following the instructions that came withthat restraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt. A child can be endangered in a crash if thechild restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.

36

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap.

A shield may take the place of hip straps. AT-shaped shield has shoulder straps that areattached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shieldhas straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-likeshield that swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

37

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Some child restraints have a LATCH system.As part of the LATCH system, your child restraintmay have lower attachments and/or a toptether. The LATCH system can help hold thechild restraint in place during driving or in a crash.Some vehicles have lower and/or top tetheranchors designed to secure a child restraint withlower attachments and/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a top tether aredesigned to be used whether the top tether isanchored or not. Other child restraints require thatthe top tether be anchored. A national or locallaw may require that the top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and thatthe tether be attached.

Your vehicle does not have lower anchors ortop tether anchors to secure a child restraintwith the LATCH system. If a national or locallaw requires that your top tether be anchored, donot use a child restraint in this vehicle becausea top tether cannot be properly anchored.

You must use the safety belts to secure your childrestraint in this vehicle, unless a national orlocal law requires that the top tether be anchored.Refer to your child restraint instructions andinstructions in this manual for securing a childrestraint using the vehicle’s safety belts.

Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat PositionYour vehicle has a passenger’s airbag. In addition,your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.The passenger sensing system is designed toturn off the passenger’s frontal airbag whenan infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 50 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 131 for more information onthis including important safety information.

38

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rearfacing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating airbag. Be sure the airbagis off before using a rear-facing childrestraint in the passenger’s position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

CAUTION: (Continued)


We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicleswith a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, wheneverpossible.

There is no top strap anchor in your vehicle.Do not secure a child seat in your vehicleif a national or local law requires that the topstrap be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 38 formore information.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the passenger’s position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seatson page 8.

39

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s frontal airbag.See Passenger Sensing System on page 50.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in your vehicle,even if the airbag is off. If your child restraintis forward-facing, move the seat as farback as it will go before securing the childrestraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, theoff indicator in the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit whenthe vehicle is started. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 131.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

40

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

41

7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters and seat massagers, locatedbetween the seat cushion and the child restraintor small occupant, can affect how the passengersensing system operates. Remove any additionalmaterial from the seat cushion before reinstallingor securing the child restraint and before asmall occupant, including a small adult, sits inthe passenger position.

If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a childrestraint in this vehicle and check with your retailer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

42

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has an airbag for the driver and anairbag for the right front passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.



Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, airbags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than moreforceful airbags have provided in the past.Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

43

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, fasterthan the blink of an eye. If you are tooclose to an inflating airbag, as you wouldbe if you were leaning forward, it couldseriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position before and during acrash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith airbags. The driver should sit as farback as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 28 and Infants and YoungChildren on page 30.

44

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 130 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steeringwheel.

45

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

46

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events andare used to predict how severe a crash is likely tobe in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontalairbags will or should deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largelyon what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front ofyour vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesnot move or deform, the threshold level forthe reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph

(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for afull deployment is about 18 to 22 mph (28.9 to35.4 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,with specific vehicle design, so that it can besomewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

47

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. Inflation is determinedby what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact,and how quickly the vehicle slows down.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel infront of the right front passenger.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Theairbag supplements the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.

But airbags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions.

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Some components of theairbag module — the steering wheel hub for thedriver’s airbag or the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s airbag — may be hot for ashort time. The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm, but not toohot to touch. There may be some smoke and dustcoming from the vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver fromseeing out of the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

48

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of thevehicle after an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing problemsfollowing an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on whenthe airbags inflate. You can lock the doors again,turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using the controls forthose features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After they inflate, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another crash. A newsystem will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 363.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your retailer for service.

49

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator will bevisible when you turn your ignition key toRUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for onand off, will be visible on the instrument panelduring the system check. When the system checkis complete, either the word ON or the wordOFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off willbe visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 131.

The passenger sensing system will turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.The driver’s airbag is not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the passenger’s seat.The sensors are designed to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupant and determine ifthe passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints not be transported in your vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows offand the airbag is off. Here is why:

United States Canada

50

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.



If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed toturn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if:• The passenger seat is unoccupied.• The system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat.• A passenger takes his/her weight off of the

seat for a period of time.• The passenger seat is occupied by a smaller

person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

51

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorin the instrument panel will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 131.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraintin the Passenger Seat Position on page 38.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a childrestraint in this vehicle and check with your retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the passenger’s frontal airbaganytime the system senses that a person of adultsize is sitting properly in the passenger’s seat.

When the passenger sensing system has allowedthe airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body build. Everyonein your vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in thepassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

52

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.



If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of thefrontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 130 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securingthe child restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the passengerposition. You may want to consider not usingseat covers or other aftermarket equipment ifyour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 55 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

53

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You do notwant the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your retailer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 369.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

54

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontof the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 354.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,the instrument panel, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system.If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 354.

55

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 318for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,the airbag may not work properly. You mayhave to replace the airbag module in thesteering wheel or both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag. Do not open or breakthe airbag coverings.

56

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to havesafety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. Newparts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the newretractor assembly will be there to help protect youin a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or ifyour airbag readiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 130.

57

✍ NOTES

58

Keys .............................................................. 60Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 62Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 63Doors and Locks .......................................... 66

Manual Door Locks ..................................... 66Power Door Locks ....................................... 67Delayed Locking .......................................... 67Automatic Door Lock ................................... 68Automatic Door Unlock ................................ 68Trunk .......................................................... 68

Windows ....................................................... 71Power Windows .......................................... 72Sun Visors .................................................. 72

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................... 73Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 73PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 75PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 75

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 77New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 77Ignition Positions ......................................... 78Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............... 79

Starting the Engine ..................................... 80Automatic Transmission Operation ............... 82Manual Transmission Operation ................... 85Parking Brake ............................................. 86Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ......................... 87Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 89Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transmission) ............................. 89Parking Over Things That Burn ................... 90Engine Exhaust ........................................... 91Running the Engine While Parked ............... 92

Mirrors ........................................................... 93Manual Rearview Mirror .............................. 93Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ......... 93Outside Power Mirrors ................................. 93

OnStar® System ............................................ 94Storage Areas ............................................... 99

Glove Box ................................................... 99Cupholder(s) ............................................... 99Center Console Storage Area .................... 100

Convertible Top .......................................... 100

Section 2 Features and Controls

59

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

60

One key works allof the lock cylinderson the vehicle.

Your vehicle has an Immobilizer VehicleTheft-Deterrent System. The key has atransponder in the key head that matches adecoder in the vehicle’s steering column.

If a replacement key or any additional key isneeded, you must purchase it from your retailer.The key will have 1 stamped on it. Keep thebar code tag that came with the original keys.Give this tag to your retailer if you need anew key made.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 359.

61

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 63.

• If you are still having trouble, see your retaileror a qualified technician for service.

62

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation

The vehicle’s doorscan be locked andunlocked, and the trunkcan be unlatchedfrom about 3 feet (1 m)up to 60 feet (18 m)away with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps may flashonce and the horn may chirp to indicatelocking has occurred. See “LOCK HORN” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 152.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one timeto unlock the driver’s door. Press the unlock buttonagain within five seconds to unlock the otherdoor. The interior lamps will come on and stay onfor 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.See “UNLOCK HORN” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152.

V (Trunk Release): Press and hold thisbutton for approximately one second to releasethe trunk lid. The trunk release will only work ifthe ignition is off or the vehicle speed is lessthan 2 mph (3 k/h).

63

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to help locate your vehicle.The horn will sound three times and the hazardlamps will flash three times. Press and holdthe button for three seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn will sound and the hazardlamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition mustbe off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm towork. Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm buttonagain or turn the ignition to ACC or RUN toturn off the alarm.

The vehicle may have Remote Lock/UnlockConfirmation. This feature provides feedback thata command has been received by the vehicle.The parking lamps will flash and the hornmay sound briefly. See “LOCK HORN”and “UNLOCK HORN” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152 for programminginformation.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach RKE transmitter is uniquely coded to preventanother transmitter from unlocking the vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your retailer. Rememberto bring any additional transmitters so theycan also be re-coded to match the new transmitter.Once your retailer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter cannot unlock the vehicle.The vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters coded to it.

64

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

If the battery is weak the transmitter will not workwithin its normal range. It is probably time tochange the battery if you have to be very closeto the vehicle before the transmitter works.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry.Static from your body transferred to thesesurfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery, do the following:1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the

notch, located below the trunk releasebutton, and pry the front and back apart.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing up. Usea type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter withthe vehicle.

65

Doors and Locks

Manual Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children,

can easily open the doors and fall outof a moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter throughan unlocked door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle. Lockingyour doors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

66

There are a couple of ways to lock and unlockyour vehicle manually.

From inside the vehicle,use the manual doorlock knob. Pull up ordown on the knob tounlock or lock the door.

To lock either door from the outside, turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle. To unlock thedoor, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle.

Power Door LocksYou can use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to lock and unlock the doors from insideor outside the vehicle. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 63 formore information.The power door lock switches are located on thedriver’s and passenger’s door.Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.

Delayed LockingIf your vehicle has power door locks, it will havethe delayed locking feature. This feature delays theactual locking of the doors when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to lock thevehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle usingthe RKE transmitter, three chimes will soundsignaling that the delayed locking feature is active.Five seconds after the last door is closed, bothdoors will lock and the parking lamps will flash.To cancel the delay and lock the doors immediately,press the lock button on the RKE a second time.

If the key is in the ignition, this feature will notlock the doors.

Your vehicle is programmed from the factory withthis feature turned off. To turn the feature on,you must go through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 152.

67

Automatic Door LockIf your vehicle has power door locks, the doors willautomatically lock when the shift lever is movedout of PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatictransmission. For a vehicle with a manualtransmission, the speed must be greater than5 mph (8 km/h).

The automatic door locking feature cannot bedisabled.

Automatic Door UnlockIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission andpower door locks, the doors with automaticallyunlock when the shift lever is moved intoPARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transmission andpower door locks, the doors will automaticallyunlock when the key is removed from the ignition.

The automatic unlock feature can be disabled orprogrammed in different ways if the vehicle hasan automatic transmission. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152 for more information.

TrunkTo release the trunk lid use either the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or see “RemoteTrunk Release” following.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive withthe trunk lid open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.


68


It can cause unconsciousness and evendeath. If you must drive with the trunklid open or if electrical wiring or othercable connections must pass throughthe seal between the body and thetrunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk frominside the vehicle, pressthe remote trunkrelease button locatedin the glovebox.

The remote trunk release will only work wheneither the ignition is off or in ACC, the parkingbrake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is lessthan 2 mph (3 km/h).

69

Emergency Trunk Release Handle Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk onthe driver’s side. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. If someone is locked in the trunk,they can pull the release handle and push thetrunk lid open from the inside to open the trunk.

70

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

71

Power Windows

If your vehicle haspower windows, theswitches on the driver’sdoor armrest controlboth windows.

In addition, the passenger’s door has a windowswitch that controls that window. Press the front ofthe switch to open the window. Pull the switchup to close it.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window has an express-down featurewhich allows the window to be lowered fully withoutpressing and holding the switch. Press the front ofthe switch to the first position, and the window willopen a small amount. Press the switch down fullyand the window will go all the way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch up.

Sun VisorsTo use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visornearest to the windshield toward you.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have a driver’s side vanitymirror. Swing down the sun visor and slide thecover to expose the mirror.

72

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

The security light,located on theinstrument panel cluster,will turn on to indicatethat arming hasbeen initiated.

Once the system is armed, the security light willflash once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door is open.

Arming the SystemWhile the ignition is off, press the remote keylessentry transmitter lock button, to arm the system.

The system will arm after either of thesethings occur:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter asecond time while all the doors are closed,the system will arm immediately. The system armsin 60 seconds if a door is open, or after theopen door is closed.

If you do not want to arm the system, lock the carwith the manual door lock knobs.

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

• Turn the ignition on.

73

If the system is armed and the trunk is openedusing the trunk release button on the transmitter,the system will temporarily disarm itself and re-armwhen the trunk has been closed. This allows you toexit the vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter,or open the trunk using the transmitter withouthaving to disarm and re-arm the system.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activated by:

• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This causesa ten second pre-alarm chirping noise followedby the horn sounding and lights flashing for30 seconds.

• Opening a passenger’s door. This immediatelycauses a full alarm of the horn sounding andlights flashing for 30 seconds.

After the 30 second alarm ends, the system willre-arm itself.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will thenre-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. This will also disarm thesystem.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press theunlock, lock, or trunk release buttons on theremote keyless transmitter, it means thatthe content theft security system alarm wasactivated previously.

74

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponderin the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is apassive theft-deterrent system. This means you donot have to do anything special to arm or disarmthe system. It works when you insert or remove thekey from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel cluster comes onwhen trying to start the vehicle, the key may havea damaged transponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

75

If the engine still does not start, and the key doesnot appear to be damaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 325.If the engine still does not start with the other key,your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle doesstart, the first key may be faulty. See your retailerwho can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 359.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keysonly. If all the currently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must see your retailer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that iscut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new key do the following:1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.2. Insert the already programmed key in the

ignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your retailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe RUN position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to LOCK.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your retailer. Your vehicle isnot protected by the PASS-Key® III+ systemat this time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

76

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform betterin the long run if you follow these guidelinesfor the first 500 miles (805 km):• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow.• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).

• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrainfrom using the full throttle while driving.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

If these break-in procedures are not followed,the vehicle’s engine, axle, or other partscould be damaged.

Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speed and loadcan be gradually increased.

77

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turnit to four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

9 (LOCK): This position locks your steeringcolumn. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transmission, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless theshift lever is in PARK (P).

If you have a manual transmission, the ignitionswitch can be turned to LOCK in any shiftlever position.

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transmissionremoving the key from the ignition switchwill lock the steering column and resultin a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.This could cause a collision. If you needto turn the engine off while the vehicleis moving, turn the key to ACC.

78

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operatessome of your electrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition.

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returnsto after you start your engine and release theswitch. The switch stays in RUN when the engineis running. But even when the engine is notrunning, you can use RUN to operate yourelectrical accessories and to display some warningand indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor while in LOCK or ACC, when the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside,as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves.If you leave the key in the ignition and park yourvehicle, a chime will sound, when you openthe driver’s door. Always remember to removeyour key from the ignition and take it with you.This will lock your ignition and transaxle.Also, always remember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You maynot be able to start your vehicle after it has beenparked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow the radioand power windows to continue to work upto 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.

Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignitionkey is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned off,the radio and power windows will continue towork for up to 10 minutes or until any dooris opened.

79

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Automatic TransmissionMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in the neutral positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor and start the engine.Your vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal isnot all the way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motor damage.

80

To prevent gear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine is alreadyrunning. Engine cranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch to ACC or LOCK.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.

If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour retailer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

81

Automatic Transmission OperationIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission,the shift lever is located on the center consolebetween the front seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you start theengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key isin RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever and push theshift lever all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 89.

82

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

At low vehicle speeds, you can also useREVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging your transmission. See If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 224 for additional information.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when yourvehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running athigh speed may damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speed when shifting your vehicle.

83

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides better fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, andyou are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,push the accelerator all the way down.The transmission will shift down to a lowergear and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 208.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transmission.Have your vehicle serviced right away. Youcan drive in LOW (L) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

FOURTH (4): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces vehiclespeed more than DRIVE (D) without using

your brakes. You might choose FOURTH (4)instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly,winding roads and when going down a steep hill.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces the vehicle’sspeed without using your brakes, for slightdowngrades where the vehicle would otherwiseaccelerate due to steepness of grade. If constantupshifting or downshifting occurs while driving onsteep hills, this position can be used to preventrepetitive types of shifts. You might chooseINTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly and winding roads.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without using yourbrakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inLOW (L), the transmission will not shift intolow gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, usethe brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

84

Manual Transmission Operation

This is the shift patternfor a manualtransmission.

Here is how to operate your manual transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal backdown. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) thesame way you do for SECOND (2).

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

85

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutchpedal. After the vehicle stops, shift intoREVERSE (R). Slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal. If it ishard to shift, let the shift lever return to NEUTRALand release the clutch pedal. Then press theclutch pedal again and shift into REVERSE (R).Do not attempt to shift into the fifth gearposition prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).Your transmission has a lock out feature whichprevents a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also, use FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R), alongwith the parking brake, for parking your vehicle.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

To se the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever.If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 134.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release buttonin as you move the brake lever all the way down.

86

If you forget to release your parking brake, a chimewill sound and a warning message will be displayedin the Driver Information Center (DIC) when thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 kph). SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 147.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.



Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingthe button on the shift lever and pushingthe lever all the way toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition keyin your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

87

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.

If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, see ifyou can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the shift lock release button.If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fullylocked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do notshift your transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull the shift leverout of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission)on page 87.

88

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need tohave another vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmissionshift lock control system.

To shift out of PARK (P):

1. Apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal,press the shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Before leaving your manual transmission vehicle,fully press the clutch pedal in, move the shiftlever in either FIRST (1) gear or REVERSE (R),and firmly apply the parking brake. See ManualTransmission Operation on page 85.

89

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

90

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on theroad or over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is cominginto your vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

91

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 91.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 218.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transmission shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmissionshift lever to PARK (P), or the manualtransmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 87 and ParkingYour Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 89.

92

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhen you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side.The day/night adjustment allows you to adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behindyou. Move the lever to the right for nighttimeuse and to the left for daytime use.

Manual Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

When you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side.The day/night adjustment allows you to adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behindyou. Move the lever to the right for nighttimeuse and to the left for daytime use.

There may also be three OnStar® buttons locatedat the bottom of the mirror face. See OnStar®

System on page 94 for more information.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door.

Move the selector switch located below thefour-way control pad to the left or right tochoose either the driver’s side or passenger’sside mirror.

To adjust a mirror, use the arrows located onthe four-way control pad to move the mirror inthe desired direction. Adjust each outside mirrorso that a little of the vehicle and the area behindit can be seen while sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

93

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide inyour glove box or visit onstar.com.

94

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services withSafe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor deliveredor OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

95

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, and can beused with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or aBell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glovebox, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca,or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressingthe OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing thephone button and giving a few simple voicecommands, you can browse through thevarious topics. See the OnStar® Owners Guidefor more information (Only available in thecontinental U.S.).

96

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 188 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be usedto dial numbers into voicemail systems, or todial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. Thevehicle information usually includes your GPSlocation and, in the event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the accident that yourvehicle has been involved in (e.g. the directionfrom which your vehicle was hit). When youuse the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we canprovide you with location-based services.

97

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service inthat area. OnStar® service also cannot workunless you are in a place where the wirelessservice provider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStar® service.Not all services are available everywhere,particularly in remote or enclosed areas, orat all times.

OnStar® service that involves locationinformation about your vehicle cannot workunless GPS satellite signals are unobstructedand available in that place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

98

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.Use the key to lock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)

There are two cupholders located in the centerconsole, press and release to extend forward.

Your vehicle has a cupholder on the passengerside of the center console. To access it, pressand release the forward section of the cupholder.

99

Center Console Storage AreaThere is also an upright center console storagearea between the seatbacks. To open the storagearea, press and release the button near the topso it extends out. Then, turn the button ineither direction to unlatch the lid and pull theconsole lid down. Press the release button backin after you close the lid.

Convertible TopFor care and cleaning of the convertible top,see Convertible Top on page 320 under “Serviceand Appearance Care”. High pressure carwashes may cause water to enter the vehicle.

The following procedures explain the properoperation of the manual convertible top.

The parts of the manual convertible top that areused when lowering and raising it are:

A. Front EdgeB. Side Edge

C. Rear ButtressesD. Trunk

100

Notice: Leaving the convertible top downand exposing the interior of your vehicleto outdoor conditions may cause damage.Always close the convertible top if leavingyour vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertible top whenthere are objects in the storage area coulddamage it or break the glass rear window.Always verify that no objects are in the storagearea before lowering the convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet,or dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damageto the inside of your vehicle. Dry off the topbefore lowering it.

Notice: If you lower the top on your vehiclein cold weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), youmay damage top components. Do not lowerthe top in cold weather.

Notice: If you raise or lower the convertibletop while the vehicle is in motion, youcould damage the top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Always put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manualtransmission in FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R),turn the ignition off and engage the parkingbrake before raising or lowering theconvertible top.

{CAUTION:

Moving parts of the convertible top canbe dangerous. People can be injured bythe convertible top and its mechanism.Keep people away from your vehiclewhen you are lowering or raising the top.

101

Lowering the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface and set the parking

brake. Shift an automatic transmission intoPARK (P). Shift a manual transmissioninto FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

2. Make sure the ignition is turned off.

3. Push the trunk release button located inthe glove box, or on the remote keylessentry, if equipped.

4. Lift the trunk.

5. The convertible top front latch, located abovethe inside rearview mirror, must be unlatched.Pull the latch down and turn it counterclockwiseto unlatch it.Leave the latch open and turned to preventdamage.

6. Pull rearward on the side edge (B) of theconvertible top and pull it off of the windshieldframe.

7. Push the convertible top down into thetrunk (D).

102

8. After the top is stored, apply one even push,as shown, on the convertible top to ensure thatthe top is fully retracted and securely stored.

9. Close the trunk (D) by pressing down on itwith a swift, firm motion.

Do not operate rear defogger when convertibletop is down.

A clear Mylar® protective film has been installedat the factory on the trunk lid surface under theconvertible top buttresses. This film is designedto help prevent paint damage to the trunk lid.Do not remove this protective film. It is intended toremain permanently affixed to the trunk lid surface.

Raising the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake

firmly and shift an automatic transmission intoPARK (P). Shift a manual transmission intoFIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

2. Make sure the ignition is turned off, and lowerthe windows.

3. Push the trunk release button located in theglove box, or on the remote keyless entry,if equipped.

4. Lift the trunk.

103

5. Pull the convertible top forward by firmlygripping the side edge (B) and applying abrisk upward and forward motion to get thetop in the full-up position.

6. Pull the front edge (A) of the convertible topforward from the outside of the vehicle, orpush the front edge (A) of the convertibletop forward from the inside of the vehicle.

7. Turn the top front latch handle clockwise tolatch the convertible top.

8. Close the trunk (D) by pushing it down witha swift, firm motion.

9. At the rear edge of the convertible top, pressdown on the two buttresses (C) to latch theminto the top of the trunk.

A clear Mylar® protective film has been installedat the factory on the trunk lid surface underthe convertible top buttresses. This film isdesigned to help prevent paint damage to thetrunk lid. Do not remove this protective film.It is intended to remain permanently affixed tothe trunk lid surface.

104

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 108Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 110Other Warning Devices ............................. 110Horn .......................................................... 110Tilt Wheel .................................................. 110Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 111Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 112Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 112Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 112Windshield Wipers ..................................... 113Windshield Washer .................................... 114Cruise Control ........................................... 115Headlamps ................................................ 118Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 119Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 119Fog Lamps ................................................ 120Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 120Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 120Mirror Reading Lamps ............................... 120Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 121Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 121Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 122

Climate Controls ......................................... 122Climate Control System ............................. 122Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 126

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 127Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 128Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 129Tachometer ............................................... 129Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 129Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 130Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 130Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 131Charging System Light .............................. 133Brake System Warning Light ..................... 134Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 135Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/

Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only) ............. 136

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ........................................ 137

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 138Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 141

Section 3 Instrument Panel

105

Security Light ............................................ 142Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 142Highbeam On Light ................................... 142Trunk Ajar Light ........................................ 142Fuel Gage ................................................. 143Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 143

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 144DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 144DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 147DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 152

Audio System(s) ......................................... 158Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 159Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 160Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 162Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 168Using an MP3 ........................................... 179XM Radio Messages ................................. 186Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 188Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 188Radio Reception ........................................ 189Care of Your CDs ..................................... 190Care of the CD Player .............................. 190Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 190XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 190

Section 3 Instrument Panel

106

✍ NOTES

107

Instrument Panel Overview

108

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate ControlSystem on page 122.

B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 126.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 111.D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped).

See Cruise Control on page 115.E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 128.F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 188.

G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 110.

H. Fog Lamp Button. See Fog Lamps on page 120.I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 120.J. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See

Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 144.K. Horn. See Horn on page 110.L. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See

Windshield Wipers on page 113 andWindshield Washer on page 114.

M. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 122.

N. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 131.

O. Shift Lever. See Manual TransmissionOperation on page 85. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 82(If Equipped).

P. Parking Brake Lever. See Parking Brakeon page 86.

Q. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 158.

R. Electronic Stability Control/Traction ControlSystem Button. See Electronic Stability Controlon page 201.

S. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). AccessoryPower Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 122 and AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 121.

T. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 99.U. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 68.V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 99.

109

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on thesteering wheel.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steeringwheel to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

110

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then movethe wheel to a comfortable position, pull upthe lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 112.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 112.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 112.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlampson page 118.

111

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out andother drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb isburned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal aturn, check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 325.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

112

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position toturn off the windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):Move the lever to this position for intermittent orspeed sensitive operation. When you selectthis position, the delay will vary depending onthe vehicles speed, as well as the manuallyselected delay.

x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band withthis symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter orlonger delay between wipes. To the left of theadjust band are bars, increasing in size frombottom to top, that indicate the frequency of thewipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement isless frequent. Larger bars mean the movementis more frequent.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the firstsetting past intermittent, for steady wiping atlow speed.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to thesecond setting past intermittent, for wiping at highspeed.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tothis position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it thereuntil the windshield wipers start; then let go.The windshield wipers will stop after one wipingcycle. If you want additional wiping cycles, hold thelever down longer.

113

Damaged wiper blades may prevent you fromseeing well enough to drive safely. To avoiddamage, be sure to clear ice and snow from thewiper blades before using them.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become damaged, get new blades or bladeinserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload. If the motor gets stuck, turn the wipersoff, clear away the snow or ice, and then turnthe wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are onfor more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampswill turn on automatically. They will turn off15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash the windshield, press the button at theend of the lever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washers willstop, but the wipers will continue to wipeabout three times or will resume the previousspeed.

114

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, your vehicle can maintain aspeed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off. The LED indicator lightwill turn on and off when this button is pressed.

115

RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.The indicator light on the button will come on.

2. Get to the speed you want.3. Press the SET− control button and release it.

The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) toshow the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. To return toyour previously set speed, you do not need togo through the set process again. Once you’regoing about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, youcan press the RES+ button briefly.

This will take you back up to your previouslychosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to increase speed.

1. Disengage the cruise control by applying thebrake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerateto a higher speed and reset the cruise control.

2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,press the RES+ button. Press it until you get upto the speed you want, and then release thebutton. To increase your speed in very smallamounts, press the RES+ button briefly andthen release it. Each time you do this, yourvehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the SET− part of the buttonuntil you reach the lower speed you want,then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET− part of the button briefly. Each time youdo this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

116

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you mayhave to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the braketakes you out of cruise control. Many drivers findthis to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end cruise control, step lightly on the brakepedal or the clutch pedal if your vehicle hasa manual transmission.

Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedalwill only end the current cruise control session.Press the cruise control on/off button to turnthe system completely off.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

117

Headlamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the followingfour positions:

2 (Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Thisposition automatically turns on the DaytimeRunning Lamps during daytime, and theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.

P (Off/On): This position is an Off/On switch forthe Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, thisapplies to vehicles with an automatic transmissionset to PARK (P) and manual transmission vehicleswith the parking brake engaged.

When operating in AUTO, a brief turn of the switchto off/on will turn off the Automatic HeadlampSystem. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message willdisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC) anda chime will sound. Turning the switch to off/onagain will turn the Automatic Headlamp Systemback on. An AUTO LIGHTS ON message willdisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

The Automatic Headlamp System is always turnedon at the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicleswith manual transmission. When the parking brakeis engaged, the automatic headlamps will turn off.For vehicles with an automatic transmission, whenthe shift lever is shifted out of PARK (P), theAutomatic Headlamp System will turn on. Shiftingthe lever back to PARK (P) will turn off theautomatic headlamp system for vehicles with anautomatic transmission.

118

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel that helps control the DRL.Make sure it is not covered or the headlampswill come on when they are not needed.

The DRL system makes both low beam headlampsturn on at reduced intensity when the followingconditions are met:• The ignition is on.• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.• The light sensor detects daytime light.• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lightswill not be on.

The DRL system turns off on U.S. vehicles byusing the on/off switch for one ignition cycle,if the vehicle is in the PARK (P) position, or if thevehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km h)after the vehicle is started.

For vehicles first sold in Canada the DRL systemwill turn off when a automatic transmissionvehicle is in the PARK (P) position or the parkbrake is set on a manual transmission vehicle andthe vehicle speed is less than 8 mph (13 km h).

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when it is needed.

119

Fog Lamps

The fog lamp buttonis located on theinstrument panel,to the left of thesteering wheel.

The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light on the instrument panel cluster willcome on when the fog lamps are on. Push thebutton again to turn the fog lamps off.

The parking lamps will automatically turn on andoff when the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe control for this feature is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lightsor down to dim them.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside your vehicle will go on when youopen any door. These lamps will fade out afterabout 20 seconds after all of the doors have beenclosed or when the ignition is turned on. Theselamps will also go on when you press thetrunk release, unlock symbol button or the hornsymbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.

The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about20 seconds after your key is removed from theignition to provide an illuminated exit.

Mirror Reading LampsYour vehicle has reading lamps on the rearviewmirror. Push the button to turn the readinglamps on and off.

120

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery saver feature designedto protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignitionis turned off, the battery rundown protectionsystem will automatically turn the lamp off after20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlet can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located on theinstrument panel, to the right of the radio.

To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your retailer foradditional information on the accessory poweroutlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included withthe equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

121

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a removable muffintin ashtray and cigarette lighter. The muffin tinashtray can be placed into the front console sidecupholder. To use the lighter, located on theinstrument panel to the left side of the glove boxdoor, push it in all the way and let go. Whenit is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

With this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation of the vehicle. Setthe control between modes to get a combinationof the two modes.

Temperature: Turn the left knob on the controlpanel to adjust the temperature of the air inthe vehicle. Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature.

Climate Control System

122

# (Air Conditioning): Press the left knob onthe control panel to turn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light on the button willcome on to let you know the air conditioning isactivated. When the system is on, this setting coolsand dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.

The air conditioning will not function if the fan isturned off. If air conditioning is selected withfan off, the indicator light flashes three times andthen turns off.

There could be a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorturns off and turns on again. This is normal. Thesystem is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintaining theselected temperature.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so a small amount of water can dripunderneath your vehicle while idling or afterturning off the engine. This is normal.

Air conditioning does not operate at temperaturebelow 40°F (4°C). In temperatures above 40°F(4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off indefrost, floor/defog, and recirculation modesbecause it helps to remove moisture from thevehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.

On hot days, open the windows to let the hotinside air escape; then close them. This helpsreduce the time it takes for the vehicle tocool down. It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select recirculation mode.

3. Select the air conditioning to on.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime can cause the air inside of the vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in the vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

123

9 (Fan): Turn the center knob on the controlpanel to control the fan speed. Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

9 (Off): Turn the center knob to this position toturn the fan off.

? (Recirculation): Press the center knob onthe control panel to recirculate air inside thevehicle and prevent outside air from coming in.It can be used to prevent outside odors fromentering your vehicle and cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly. Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. An indicator lighton the button can on while the recirculationmode is activated.

Recirculation is available in the bi-level and ventmodes. If recirculation is selected in eitherfloor/heat, floor/defog, or defrost mode, theindicator light will flash three times indicating it isnot available in that mode.

The right knob on the control panel is used todirect the airflow inside the vehicle. Turn the knobto select one of the following modes:

H (Vent): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct air to the instrumentpanel outlets, and the remaining air to thefloor outlets and the defroster and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct most of the air to thefloor outlets. The remaining air is directed to theside window and defroster outlets. If low or noairflow is on the passenger side, make sure that thecarpet covering is tucked under floor outlets.

124

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield and side windows. Use the defogmode to clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. For best results, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield before defrosting. Use atemperature setting that provides warm air. Thewarmer the air the quicker the windows clear.

To prevent fogging on the inside of the windowsin modes other than floor/defog and defrost,make sure the air conditioning compressor is onand recirculation mode is off.

/ (Floor/Defog): Turn the right knob on thecontrol panel to this mode to direct the air to thewindshield, the side window outlets, and to the flooroutlets. When you select this mode, the systemruns the air conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is near freezing or below.

0 (Defrost): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct most of the air tothe windshield, and the side window outlets.When you select this mode, the system runs theair conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming gridto remove fog or frost from the rear window. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible. An indicator light on the knob comeson while the rear window defogger is activated.The rear window defogger will turn off aboutfifteen minutes after the knob is pressed. If turnedon again, the defogger will run for about seven andone-half minutes before turning off. If vehiclespeed is greater than 50 mph (80 kph) and therear defogger is active, it will remain on as longas the speed is greater than 50 mph (80 kph).The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe knob again or by turning off the engine.

125

Do not use the rear defogger when the convertibletop is down.

= (Rear Defogger): Press the right knob onthe control panel to turn the rear window defoggeron or off. Do not use the rear defogger whenthe convertible top is down.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and on theside of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.

Use the tab located on the air outlets to changethe direction of the airflow.

Your vehicle has flow through ventilation thatallows outside air to be forced through yourventilation system when your vehicle is moving.Outside air will enter the vehicle when the airconditioning fan is running. Flow throughventilation can be stopped in vent and bi-levelmodes by pressing the recirculation button.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-Saturn approved hood deflectorsmay adversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

126

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

127

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will needto drive safely and economically.

United States Base Cluster shown, Canada and Uplevel similar

128

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour(mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

The vehicle’s odometer works together with theDriver Information Center (DIC). A Trip A andTrip B odometer can be set. See “Trip Information”under DIC Operation and Displays on page 144.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Open the driver’s door and themileage will be displayed briefly.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not operate the engine with the tachometerin the shaded warning area.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driver safetybelt light will also be provided and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and lightwill be repeated if thedriver remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chimenor the light will be provided.

129

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 50 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensor, theairbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For more informationon the airbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 43.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

130

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stayson after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key toRUN or START. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.There is a passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel.

The indicator next to the passenger airbag statusindicator lights is the passenger safety beltreminder light. See Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light on page 130 for more informationon that indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.


131

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 50 for more on this,including important safety information.

132

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 130.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and whenthe engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked by your retailer.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

133

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure the parkingbrake is fully released. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 230.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


134

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine isstarted and may stay on for several seconds.That is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop as soonas possible and turn the ignition off. Then startthe engine again to reset the system. If thelight still stays on after driving at a speed of atleast 13 mph (20 km/h), or comes on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service.

If the regular brake system warning light is noton, you still have brakes, but you do not haveanti-lock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning lightis also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes andthere is a problem with your regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 134.

The ABS warning light will come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to RUN. This isnormal. If the light does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

135

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only)

This light is located inthe center of theinstrument panel cluster.

For vehicles that have the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system or the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this warning light should come onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. This light, along with the appropriateDriver Information Center (DIC) messages,indicates when the ESC system and the TCS areworking or are disabled.

If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS andpotentially the ESC system have been disabled.Check your DIC messaging to determinewhich feature(s) is no longer functioning andwhether it is because of the driver turning off thefeature(s), or the system may not be workingproperly and your vehicle requires service. If theTCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be limited.If the ESC system is disabled, the system will notaid in maintaining vehicle directional control. Ineither case, adjust your driving accordingly.

136

If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or theESC system is actively working. Check theDIC messaging for details to determine whichsystem is working. If the LOW TRACTIONmessage appears, the system is limiting wheelspin. If the ESC ACTIVE message appears,the system is aiding in maintaining vehicledirectional control.

See Electronic Stability Control on page 201 andTraction Control System (TCS) on page 199for more information.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 147for more information on the messages associatedwith this light.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come onwhen the engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 258 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 258. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when startingyour vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.

137

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle. Thissystem is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 233.

138

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your retailer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 238.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

139

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 235. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your retailer can check the vehicle.Your retailer has the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical orelectrical problems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your retailercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

140

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine,or come on when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working, but the light will goout when you turn the ignition to START.If it does not come on with the ignition on, youmay have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

141

Security Light

This light flashes whenthe vehicle securitysystem is activated.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 120 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 112.

Trunk Ajar Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on and a chime will sound ifthe trunk is ajar. There will also be a TRUNK AJARmessage in your Driver Information Center (DIC).For more information see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 147. Do not drive with thetrunk ajar.

142

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells youabout how much fuelyou have left.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 331.

Low Fuel Warning Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come onbriefly when youare starting the engine.

This light also comes on when the fuel tank is lowon fuel. When you add fuel the light should gooff. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

143

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status ofmany of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is alsoused to display driver personalization menu modesand warning/status messages. All messages willappear in the DIC display, located at the bottom ofthe tachometer on the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left sideof the steering wheel.

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button to reset somevehicle information mode displays, select apersonalization menu mode setting, oracknowledge a warning message.

Press and hold the information and reset buttonsat the same time for one second, then releasethe buttons to enter the personalization menu.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 152 formore information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. TheDIC has different modes which can be accessedby pressing the DIC buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following.

144

Information Modes

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following vehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature and OdometerPress the information button until the outside airtemperature and the odometer are displayed. Thismode shows the temperature outside of the vehiclein either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degreesCelsius (°C) and the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).The outside air temperature will appear on the leftside of the DIC display and the odometer willappear on the right side of the display.

To change the DIC display to English or metricunits, see “UNITS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152.

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the information button until TRIP A or TRIP Bis displayed. These modes show the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for each tripodometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).Both odometers can be used at the same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometeris displayed.

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGEis displayed. This mode shows the remainingdistance you can drive without refueling in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based onfuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. The FUEL RANGE modecannot be reset.

145

ECON (Economy)Press the information button until ECON isdisplayed. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)your vehicle is getting based on current and pastdriving conditions.

Press and hold the reset button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fueleconomy is not reset, it will be continually updatedeach time you drive.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED isdisplayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s averagespeed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h).

Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE isdisplayed. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after anoil change. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Engine Oil on page 245 andScheduled Maintenance on page 336.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil Life System onpage 250.

COOLANTPress the information button until COOLANT isdisplayed. This mode shows the temperature of theengine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) ordegrees Celsius (°C).

146

BOOST (Turbo Only)If your vehicle has this feature, press theinformation button until BOOST is displayed. Thismode shows a graphic that indicates the amountof boost the engine is receiving in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message will clear when the vehicle’s conditionis no longer present. To acknowledge a messageand clear it from the display, press and holdany of the DIC buttons. If the condition is stillpresent, the warning message will come back onthe next time the vehicle is turned off and backon. With most messages, a warning chime soundswhen the message displays. Your vehicle mayhave other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays to inform the driver that thebrake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.The brake system warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 134 for more information.Have the brake system serviced by your retaileras soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engineoil has expired and it should be changed.

When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, youstill must reset the engine oil life systemseparately. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 250 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 336 for more information.

147

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to makesure that it is on properly. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turnthe message off.

COMPETITIVE MODEIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays when the Competitive Driving mode isselected. The Traction Control System (TCS) willnot be operating while in the CompetitiveDriving mode and the ESC/TCS light on theinstrument panel cluster will be on solid. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See Electronic StabilityControl on page 201 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)on page 136 for more information.

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise controlsystem is active. See Cruise Control on page 115for more information.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of thevehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When thismessage displays, make sure that the door(s)are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourretailer immediately.

148

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control(ESC), this message displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel cluster flasheswhen ESC is assisting you with directional controlof the vehicle. You may feel or hear the systemworking and see this message displayed inthe DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist whenthis message is displayed, so adjust yourdriving accordingly. This message may stay on fora few seconds after ESC stops assisting youwith directional control of the vehicle. Thisis normal when the system is operating. SeeElectronic Stability Control on page 201 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0LEngine Only) on page 136 for more information.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFFIf your vehicle has Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this message displays and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when ESC is turned off. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See Electronic StabilityControl on page 201 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)on page 136 for more information.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 63.

149

LOW COOLANTThis message displays when there is a low levelof engine coolant. Have the cooling systemserviced by your retailer as soon as possible.See Engine Coolant on page 255 for moreinformation.

LOW TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel clusterflashes when the system is actively limiting wheelspin. Slippery road conditions may exist if thismessage is displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. This message stays on for a fewseconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 199and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation.

PARKING BRAKEThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 86 formore information.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your retailer immediately.

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL)If your vehicle has Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this message displays and a chimesounds if there has been a problem detected withESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. This light stays on solid aslong as the detected problem remains present.When this message displays, the system is notworking. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeElectronic Stability Control on page 201 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L EngineOnly) on page 136 for more information.

150

If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition offand then back on. If this message still stays on orturns back on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have the ESC inspected byyour retailer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays and a chimesounds when the system is not functioningproperly. The ESC/TCS light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. This light stays onsolid as long as the detected problem remainspresent. When this message displays, the systemis not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 199and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation. Have the TCS serviced by yourretailer as soon as possible.

TRACTION OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when the TCS is turned off. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 199 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)on page 136 for more information.

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk lid is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunklid is closed completely. See Trunk on page 68and Trunk Ajar Light on page 142.

151

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to apreferred setting. All of the features listed may notbe available on your vehicle. Only the featuresavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state sincethat time.

To change feature settings, use the followingprocedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is

stopped.To avoid excessive drain on the battery,it is recommended that the headlampsare turned off.

2. Press and hold the information and resetbuttons at the same time for one second, thenrelease to enter the personalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will beaccessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll throughthe available settings for each mode.If you do not make a selection withinten seconds, the display will go back tothe previous information displayed.

Personalization Menu ModesOIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can resetthe engine oil life system. To reset the system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 250. See“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displayson page 144 for more information.

152

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display thevehicle information. When UNITS appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): Allinformation will be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information willbe displayed in metric units.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move onto the next feature.

LOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on thefirst press of the lock button on the RKEtransmitter. The horn will still chirp on thesecond press.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 63 for more information.


153

UNLOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp on the first press of the unlock button on theRKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when theunlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press ofthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter.



LIGHT FLASHIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorhazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time thelock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on theRKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears onthe display, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting willnot flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signallighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunkrelease buttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.



154

DELAY LOCKThis feature, which delays the actual locking ofthe vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. WhenDELAY LOCK appears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door is closed. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter a second time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately whenpressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

See Delayed Locking on page 67 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 63for more information.


AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle toautomatically unlock certain doors, can be enabledor disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automaticallyunlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door will automaticallyunlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.You will need to manually unlock the doors.

If you have a manual transmission vehicle, thedoor(s) will automatically unlock when the key isturned off.

155

If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, youcan select when the automatic unlocking will occur.See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic TransmissionOnly)” following.

See Automatic Door Unlock on page 68 for moreinformation.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move onto the next feature.

UNLK (Unlock)(Automatic Transmission Only)This screen displays only if your vehicle has anautomatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL isselected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic door unlocking willoccur. When UNLK appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

See Automatic Door Unlock on page 68 formore information.


EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTSappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will notturn on when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.

156

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting willturn on when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC will display. When LANGUAGEappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display allinformation in English.

FRENCH: The DIC will display all informationin French.

SPANISH: The DIC will display all informationin Spanish.

GERMAN: The DIC will display all informationin German.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and exit outof the personalization menu mode.

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited whenany of the following conditions occur:

• A ten second time period has elapsed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The end of the personalization menu listis reached.

157

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 192. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainment



tasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 192.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

158

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your retailer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere withthe operation of sound equipment thathas been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, theaudio system can be played even after theignition is turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 79 for more information.

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numberedone through six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) orRUN. Press the power knob, located in thecenter of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time.

4. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing willstop after five seconds and the currenttime displayed will be automatically set.

159

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

160

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the clock button when the radiois on. The date with display times out after afew seconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

161

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio remembers the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. You can stillmanually adjust the volume by using thevolume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

162

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set,returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob or bass/treblepushbutton until the desired tone control labelappears on the display. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the setting. You can also adjustthe setting by pressing either the SEEK, FWD(forward), or REV (reverse) buttons. The displayshows the current bass or treble level. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or if there is static, decreasethe treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual appears on the display or startto manually adjust the bass or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

163

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label appearson the display. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the setting. You canalso adjust the setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV buttons.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your retailer forservice.

Loc (Locked): This message is displayed whilethe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears onthe radio display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 190 for more information.

164

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD EJECT button toeject the CD. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD automatically pullsback into the player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track appears on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthis pushbutton to advance playback quickly withina track. You will hear sound at a reducedvolume. Release this pushbutton to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track appearson the display.

165

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toCD tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from the CDyou are listening to in random order. Therandom icon appears on the display.

2. Press this button again to turn off randomplay. The random icon disappears from thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated (played over and over).

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. An arrow symbolappears on the display. Press RPT againto turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for a few seconds.An arrow symbol appears on the display.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.When repeat is off, the symbol is no longerdisplayed.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number appears on the display while aCD is in the player. Press this button againand the system automatically searches for anauxiliary input device such as a portable audioplayer.

166

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could befor one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD-R.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc.to the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 192 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the car speakers.

167

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmay want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While theradio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the stationname or call letters appear on the display.

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

168

In rare cases, a radio station may broadcastincorrect information that causes the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same asyou drive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCVsetting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volume compensation. Eachhigher setting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.The display times out after approximately10 seconds.

169

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT may appear.Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label is displayed.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls if thevehicle has this feature. See Defensive Drivingon page 192.

170

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1through 6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

171

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels appear on thedisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. You can also adjust the highlighted settingby pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward) orREV (reverse) button until the desired levelsare obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak,or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels appear on the display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

172

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.

2. Press either of the two buttons belowthe desired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theXM CAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

173

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your retailerfor service.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 186 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

174

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs on page 190 for more information.



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD EJECT button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the playerand begin playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theEJECT button for two seconds to eject all discs.

175

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrowis held, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward throughthe tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track appears on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthis button to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of the track appears onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CDplayer. To use random, do one of the following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a singleCD player, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label appears on thedisplay.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button.A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into theslot of the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, pressthe pushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.Press the same pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

176

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberappears on the display when a CD is in theplayer. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected,“No Input Device Found” displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscIf your radio system has a single CD (MP3) playeror a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 179later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could befor one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer while reporting theproblem.

177

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player,etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 192 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the car speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmay want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

178

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3 files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressedaudio format.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 fileson one disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

179

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. Long file, folder, or playlistnames, or a combination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists can cause theplayer to be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, and might not fully display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disccan cause the disc not to function in theplayer.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions are not displayedon a CD-R that was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

180

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)first and then goes to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of the folder, theradio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software, can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

181

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording,the quality of the music that has been recorded,and the way the CD-R has been handled. Therecan be an increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting.

If these problems occur, check the bottom surfaceof the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD willnot play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled,see Care of Your CDs on page 190 for moreinformation.



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

182

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beep willsound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times,the player continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

183

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3 files on the CD-R can be played in random,rather than sequential order, on one CD-R orall discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random,do one of the following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order fromthe CD-R that is currently playing, pressthe pushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Random Current Disc displays.Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, pressthe pushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.Press the same pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-R beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on thesecond line of the display between the arrows.Once all songs by that artist are played, the playermoves to the next artist in alphabetical orderon the CD-R and begins playing MP3 files bythat artist. If you want to listen to MP3 filesby another artist, press the pushbutton locatedbelow either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

184

To change from playback by artist to playbackby album, press the pushbutton located belowthe Sort By label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the album button.Press the pushbutton below the back label toreturn to the main music navigator screen.The album name displays on the second linebetween the arrows and songs from the currentalbum and begins to play. Once all songs fromthat album are played, the player moves tothe next album in alphabetical order on the CD-Rand begins playing MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return tonormal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button toplay a CD while listening to the radio. The CDicon and a message showing disc and/ortrack number displays while a CD is in theplayer. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected,“No Aux Input Device” displays.

185

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and textdata. No action is needed. This message should disappearshortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

186

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour retailer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

187

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCK or LOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio willnot operate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Radio controls arelocated on the right sideof the steering wheeland if your vehiclehas this feature, someaudio controls canbe adjusted atthis location. Theyinclude the following.

x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous stored radio station andstay there. Press and hold the up or down arrowlonger than three-quarters of a second to advanceto the next or previous station with a strongsignal in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track. Pressand hold the up or down arrow longer thanthree-quarters of a second to continue advancingahead or reversing back, to other tracks withinthe disc.

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button tosilence the system. Press this button again toturn the sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®,press and hold this button for two secondsto initiate the OnStar system. See OnStar® Systemon page 94 in this manual for more information.

188

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM, especially at night. The longer rangecan cause station frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radio reception, mostAM radio stations will boost the power levelsduring the day, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can also occur whenthings like storms and power lines interferewith radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

189

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scansthe bottom surface of the disc. If the surface ofa CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution mixedwith water, and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the fender. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemYour vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radioantenna that is located on the trunk of yourvehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and icebuild up for clear radio reception.

190

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 192Defensive Driving ...................................... 192Drunken Driving ........................................ 193Control of a Vehicle .................................. 196Braking ...................................................... 196Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 197Braking in Emergencies ............................. 199Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 199Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 200Electronic Stability Control ......................... 201Steering .................................................... 203Off-Road Recovery .................................... 206Passing ..................................................... 206Loss of Control .......................................... 208Driving at Night ......................................... 209Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 210

City Driving ............................................... 213Freeway Driving ........................................ 214Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 215Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 216Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 216Winter Driving ........................................... 218If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 224Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 225Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 225

Towing ........................................................ 230Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 230Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 230Towing a Trailer ........................................ 230

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

191

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 12.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

192

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

193

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

194

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

195

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 199 andElectronic Stability Control on page 201.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 233.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 134.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

196

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 135.

197

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

198

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a traction controlsystem called TCS that limits wheel spin. Thisis especially useful in slippery road conditions.

The system operates only if it senses that the rearwheels are spinning too much or are beginningto lose traction. When this happens, the systemworks the rear brakes and reduces enginepower (by closing the throttle and managingengine spark) to limit wheel spin.

This light will flashwhen your tractioncontrol system islimiting wheel spin.You may feel or hearthe system working,but this is normal.

See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 111.

199

When the system is on,this warning light willcome on and stay on tolet you know if thereis a problem.

When this light is on solid and either the SERVICETRACTION or TRACTION OFF message isdisplayed, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 147.

The traction control system automatically comes onwhenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. You can turnthe traction control system off if you ever need to.

To turn the system off,press and release thisbutton located onthe console.

Press the traction control system button again toturn the system back on. The DIC will displaythe appropriate message when you pressthe button.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 233 for more information.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour vehicle may have a limited-slip reardifferential which provides maximum power andperformance. It is designed to give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. Itworks like a standard axle most of the time, butwhen one of the rear wheels has no tractionand the other does, this feature will allowthe wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

During a sudden shift, such as shifting fromFIRST (1) to SECOND (2) gear at low enginespeeds or suddenly applying the clutch, you mayfeel or hear a clunking or rattling noise. This isnormal.

200

Electronic Stability ControlYour vehicle may be equipped with an ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system which combinesantilock brake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working. This is normaland does not mean there is a problem withyour vehicle. The system should initialize beforethe vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). Insome cases, it may take approximately two milesof driving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theESC/TCS light will be on solid, and the ESCOFF or SERVICE ESC message will be displayed.For more information, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 144 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)on page 136.

This light is locatedon the instrumentpanel cluster.

It will flash when the ESC system is both on andactivated. You may also feel or hear the systemworking; this is normal.

When the light is on solid and either the SERVICEESC or ESC OFF message is displayed, thesystem will not assist the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 147.

See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation.

201

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemautomatically comes on whenever you start yourvehicle. To assist the driver with vehicle directionalcontrol, especially in slippery road conditions,you should always leave the system on. You canturn ESC off if you ever need to.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systembegins to assist the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flashand the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 115.

The ESC/TCS buttonis located on theinstrument panel.

The traction control system can be turned offor back on by pressing the ESC/TCS button.To disable both traction control and ESC, pressand hold the button briefly.

When the ESC system is turned off, the ESC OFFmessage will first appear, then the TRACTIONOFF message and the ESC/TCS light will beon solid to warn the driver that both traction controland ESC are disabled.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuckin sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock”your vehicle to attempt to free it. See If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 224. Also, see “Competitive Driving Mode”later in this section.

ESC may also turn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with the system. The ESCOFF and SERVICE ESC messages and theESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driverthat ESC is disabled and requires service. Ifthe problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your retailer forservice. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 147 for more information.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 233 for more information.

202

Competitive Driving ModeThe driver can select this optional handling modeby pressing the ESC/TCS button on the consoletwo times within a five second time period.COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the DIC.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 147 formore information. Competitive Driving Mode allowsthe driver to have full control of the rear wheelswhile the ESC system helps maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle by selective brake application.When Competitive Mode is selected, the tractioncontrol system will not be operating. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. This mode should only be usedfor driving in closed course or track driving venues.

When you press the ESC button again, or restart thevehicle, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.

Notice: When traction control is turned off,or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it ispossible to lose traction. If you attempt to shiftwith the rear wheels spinning with a loss oftraction, it is possible to cause damage to thetransmission. Do not attempt to shift when therear wheels do not have traction. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered.See your warranty book for additionalinformation.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

203

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 199 and Electronic Stability Controlon page 201.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


204

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked carsand stops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes. See Brakingon page 196. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

205

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothingin the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. You can turn the steeringwheel up to one-quarter turn until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for a better time.

206

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

207

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid arebest handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

208

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

If the ABS is ever disabled, in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark.

209

When you are faced with severe glare, as from adriver who does not lower the high beams, ora vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down alittle. Avoid staring directly into the approachingheadlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

210

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

211

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 284.

212

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 214.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

213

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless youwant to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

214

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you caneasily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at Saturn retailers all across theUnited States and Canada. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflatedto the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should you delayyour trip a short time to avoid a major stormsystem?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

215

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with

a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

216

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission. These parts canwork hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and youcan climb the hill better.

217

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 284.

218

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

219

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, orgrip, and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

220

The Traction Control System (TCS) improves yourability to accelerate when driving on a slipperyroad. But you can turn the TCS off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off ifyour vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224. Even though yourvehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),you will want to slow down and adjust your drivingto the road conditions. Under certain conditions,you may want to turn the TCS off, such aswhen driving through deep snow and loose gravel,to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 199and Electronic Stability Control on page 201.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 197.

If the ABS is ever disabled, if you feel your vehiclebegin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Pushthe brake pedal down steadily to get the mosttraction you can.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumpsof trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

221

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you couldbe in a serious situation. You should probablystay with your vehicle unless you know forsure that you are near help and you can hikethrough the snow. Here are some things to doto summon help and keep yourself and yourpassengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulatorsfrom newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

222

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot seeit or smell it, so you might not know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking your exhaust pipe. Andcheck around again from time to time to besure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it goa little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

223

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out whenyou are stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transmission orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 303.

224

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you shouldturn the traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 199 and ElectronicStability Control on page 201. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission betweenFIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),spinning the wheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear, allow the wheelsto stop spinning before shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicleout after a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 230.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weight and includes theweight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options. Two labels on yourvehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information labeland the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

225

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,you will find the label attached below the doorlatch. This label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 284 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 292.

There is also important loading information onthe vehicle Certification label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

226

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is neither designed nor intendedto tow a trailer.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight @ 150 lbs(68 kg) x 1 =

150 lbs (68 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1

227




300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 100 lbs (45 kg)




400 lbs (181 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

228

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attachedto the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

229

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 359.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing yourvehicle may cause damage to the vehicle.Always put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.

Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended tobe towed with any of its wheels on the ground.If your vehicle must be towed, see “Towing YourVehicle” earlier in this section.

Towing a TrailerYour vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

230

Service ........................................................ 233Accessories and Modifications ................... 233California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 234Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 234Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 235Fuel ............................................................. 235

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 235Gasoline Specifications .............................. 236California Fuel ........................................... 236Additives ................................................... 236Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 237Filling the Tank ......................................... 238Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 240

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 240Hood Release ........................................... 241Engine Compartment Overview .................. 242Engine Oil ................................................. 245Engine Oil Life System .............................. 250Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 252Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 254Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 254Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 254

Engine Coolant .......................................... 255Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 258Engine Overheating ................................... 258Cooling System ......................................... 260Power Steering Fluid ................................. 266Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 267Brakes ...................................................... 268Battery ...................................................... 271Jump Starting ............................................ 272

Rear Axle .................................................... 278Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 278Bulb Replacement ....................................... 279

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 279Headlamps and Parking Lamps ................. 279Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ............................................ 280Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Sidemarker Lamps .......................... 281Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 282License Plate Lamp ................................... 282Replacement Bulbs ................................... 283

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 283

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

231

Tires ............................................................ 284Winter Tires .............................................. 286Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 287Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 289Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 292Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 294When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 296Buying New Tires ...................................... 296Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 298Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 299Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 300Wheel Replacement .................................. 300Tire Chains ............................................... 303If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 303Tire Inflator Kit .......................................... 304

Appearance Care ........................................ 315Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 315Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 316Leather ...................................................... 317Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 317Care of Safety Belts .................................. 318Weatherstrips ............................................ 318Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 318

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 319Finish Care ............................................... 319Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 319Convertible Top ......................................... 320Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 320Tires ......................................................... 321Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 321Finish Damage .......................................... 322Underbody Maintenance ............................ 322Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 322Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 323

Vehicle Identification .................................. 324Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 324Service Parts Identification Label ............... 324

Electrical System ........................................ 325Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 325Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 325Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 325Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 325Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 326Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 328

Capacities and Specifications .................... 331

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

232

ServiceYour Saturn retailer knows your vehicle bestand wants you to be happy with it. We hopeyou will go to your retailer for all your serviceneeds. You will get genuine Saturn partsand Saturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturnvehicle all Saturn.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saturn accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on yourvehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorizeyour vehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.When you go to your Saturn retailer and askfor Saturn accessories, you will know thatSaturn-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine Saturnaccessories.

233

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 369.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 54.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 349.

234

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. You may alsouse regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration maybe slightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock. If the octane is less than 87,you may notice a heavy knocking noise whenyou drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher and you hear heavy knocking, yourengine needs service.

235

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). Saturn recommends against the useof gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 236 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission controlsystem performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn onand your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.If this occurs, return to your authorized Saturnretailer for diagnosis. If it is determined thatthe condition is caused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

236

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. We recommend thatyou use these gasolines if they comply withthe specifications described earlier. However,E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing morethan 10% ethanol must not be used in vehiclesthat were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, returnto your retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

237

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from thefuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

238

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignitesit, you could be badly burned. Fuel canspray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. This spray can happen if yourtank is nearly full, and is more likely inhot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 318.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.

Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).The CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuelcap is not properly installed. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 147 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump orby notifying the station attendant. Leavethe area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.

239

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it isin your vehicle. Static electricity dischargefrom the container can ignite the gasolinevapor. You can be badly burned and yourvehicle damaged if this occurs. To helpavoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

240

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Locate the interiorhood release lever.It is located belowthe instrument panelon the driver’s sideof the vehicle.

2. Pull down on therear edge of thelever to releasethe hood latch.

3. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up onthe rear edge of the hood, near the windshieldto open the hood.

Notice: Closing the hood with the doors openmay damage the hood and/or doors. Alwaysclose the doors before closing the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then, pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

241

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

242

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 267.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Cooling System on page 260.

C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 268and Hydraulic Clutch on page 254.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oilon page 245.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 252.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to AddEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 245.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. SeePower Steering Fluid on page 266.

H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).See Jump Starting on page 272.

I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 271.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 272.K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood

Fuse Block on page 328.

243

When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

244

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 267.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Cooling System on page 260.

C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 268and Hydraulic Clutch on page 254.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 245.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 252.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to AddEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 245.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. SeePower Steering Fluid on page 266.

H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).See Jump Starting on page 272.

I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 271.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 272.K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood

Fuse Block on page 328.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 242for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

245

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, youwill need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 331.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If theengine has so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark that shows theproper operating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 242for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.

2.4L L4 Engine 2.0L L4 Engine

246

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseFor Vehicles With the 2.0L L4 Engine

Look for two things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M, such asMobil 1® or equivalent. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic.

However, not all synthetic oils will meet thisGM standard. You should look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container showits viscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM4718M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

247

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory witha synthetic oil which meets all requirementsfor your vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil tomaintain engine oil level, oil meeting GMStandard GM4718M may not be available.You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718Mshould not be used for an oil change.

For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 Engine

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

248

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting GM Standard GM6094Mand have the starburst symbol on the front ofthe oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

249

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System,a computer system that lets you know when tochange the engine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and engine temperature, andnot on mileage. Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change will be indicatedcan vary considerably. For the oil life systemto work properly, you must reset the system everytime the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON messagewill come on. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 147. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the system must be reset.

Your retailer has trained service people who willperform this work using genuine Saturn parts andreset the system. It is also important to check youroil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates whento change your engine oil and filter basedon vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, resetthe system so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

250

After changing the engine oil, the system must bereset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttonson the Driver Information Center (DIC) atthe same time to enter the personalizationmenu. See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 152.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modesuntil the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DICdisplay shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This willtell you the system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the resetprocedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your retailer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

251

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 242for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

2.4L L4 Engine

2.0L L4 Engine

252

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter element at eachscheduled Maintenance II service interval andreplace the air cleaner/filter element at thefirst oil change after 50,000 miles (85 000 km).If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, open the clampsthat hold the cover on and lift off the cover.Be sure to reinstall the cover tightly.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

253

Automatic Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluidlevel. A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take yourvehicle to a Saturn retailer and have it repaired assoon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inthe Maintenance Schedule. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 336. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 345.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 345.

Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the manualtransmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak isthe only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to a Saturn retailer for service.Have it repaired as soon as possible. Youmay also have your fluid level checked by yourSaturn retailer when you have your oil changed.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 345 for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid from the brake mastercylinder reservoir.

See Brakes on page 268 for more information.

254

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 258.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

255

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your retailer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use onlythe proper mixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 345 for more information.

256

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 242for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should beat the COLD FILL line.

Do not overfill the surge tank. Too much coolantcan result in an overflow condition when thefluid is hot.

257

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool. If thecoolant surge tank is empty, a special fillprocedure is necessary. See Engine Overheatingon page 258 for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure itis hand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 242 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolant temperature warninglight on your vehicle’s instrument panel. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 137 for more information.

258

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn engine coolant temperature warning canindicate a serious problem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 137.

If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,but see or hear no steam, the problem may notbe too serious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the engine coolant temperature warningwith no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

259

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have not stopped,pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idlethe engine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

2.4L L4 Engine

260

A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

2.0L L4 Engine

261

The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanare running. If the engine is overheating, the fanshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.

If you have not found a problem yet, check tosee if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.

262

If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not atthe COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 255 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,add coolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

263

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure capwhen the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowly counterclockwise abouttwo or two and one-half turns. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allowany pressure still left to be vented outthe discharge hose.

2. Then keepturning thepressurecap slowly,and remove it.

264

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the COLD FILL line. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see if the levelis below the COLD FILL line. If the levelis below the line, add additional coolant tobring the level up to the line. Repeat thisprocedure until the level remains constant atthe COLD FILL line for at least five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lowerthan the COLD FILL line, add more of theproper mixture to the coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches the COLD FILL line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.See your retailer, if necessary.

265

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartmentOverviewon page 242for reservoirlocation.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is aleak in the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between the COLD andHOT marks. If necessary, add only enough fluidto bring the level up to the COLD mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 345.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

266

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 242for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

267

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 242 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake and/or clutch hydraulic system. If itis, you should have your brake and/or clutchsystem fixed, since a leak means that sooner orlater your brakes and/or clutch will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake/clutchfluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your brake linings are worn, thenyou will have too much fluid when you getnew brake linings. You should add or removefluid, as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake/clutch hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 134.

268

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 345.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap andthe area around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch system, the brakes/clutchmay not work well, or they may not evenwork at all. This could cause a crash.Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake/clutch system parts. For example,just a few drops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can damage brake/clutchsystem parts so badly that they willhave to be replaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 318.

269

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Front disc brake pads have built-in wear indicatorsthat make a high-pitched warning sound whenthe brake pads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound may come and go or be heardall the time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound meansthat soon the brakes will not work well.That could lead to an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear warning sound,have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to Saturntorque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your retailer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

270

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality Saturn brake parts. When youreplace parts of your braking system — forexample, when your brake linings wear downand you need new ones put in — be sure youget new approved Saturn replacement parts.If you do not, your brakes may no longer workproperly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakescan change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts inthe wrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 242 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

271

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 272 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

272

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump startingyour vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories pluggedinto the cigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

273

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal.

The remote positive (+)terminal is locatedunder a red plasticcover on the enginecompartment fuse block.Open the cover toaccess the terminal.

The remote negative (−)ground bracket islocated in the rear ofthe engine compartment,on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle, and ismarked GND (−).

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 242 for more information on the locationof the positive (+) and negative (−) terminalson your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

274

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or onyour skin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

275

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal.Connect it to the positive (+) terminal ofthe good battery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cableto the negative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote negative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the dead battery.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)ground bracket for this purpose. See EngineCompartment Overview Engine CompartmentOverview on page 242 for more informationon the location of the remote positive (+) andremote negative (−) terminals.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

276

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

277

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 345.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, theheadlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may be necessary if itis difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontalaim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beamheadlamps at you (for vertical aim). If youbelieve your headlamps need to be re-aimed, werecommend that you take your vehicle to yourretailer for service.

278

Bulb ReplacementFor the type of bulb to use, see ReplacementBulbs on page 283.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed inthis section, contact your retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps and Parking Lamps

A. High-beam HeadlampB. Low-beam HeadlampC. Parking Lamp

279

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the hood. See Hood Release

on page 241 for more information.

2. Remove the bulb access cover from the bulb(high or low-beam only) you need to change.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it from the headlamp assembly.

4. Remove the electrical connector from thebulb socket.

5. Holding the base of the socket, pull the oldbulb from the socket.

6. Install a new bulb.7. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall.

Front Turn Signal, Parking andFog Lamps

A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

B. Fog Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on

page 241 for more information.2. Reach underneath the front bumper and

locate the bulb assembly.3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

pull out the bulb assembly.4. Disconnect the bulb socket from the electrical

connector.5. Install a new bulb.6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.

280

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Sidemarker LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68for more information.

2. Remove the two screws, which hold thetaillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly upwards andsideways to disengage it from the vehicle.

4. Remove the taillamp assembly.5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

to remove.6. Pull the bulb from the socket.7. Install a new bulb.8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp

assembly.

281

Back-Up Lamps

The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.

To replace a bulb, do the following:1. Reach behind, up and under the rear bumper

and locate the bulb socket.2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the

bulb assembly.3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs

in the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise tosecure it.

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

lamp assembly.

282

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up, Stoplamp,Taillamp and Turn Signal 3157K

Fog Lamp H11

Front Parking Lamp(In Headlamp Assembly) W5W-B50X2

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp(Below Headlamp Assembly) 5702KA

Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp 194

License Plate Lamp 168

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam H11

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour retailer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 336 for more information.Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 347.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assemblydo the following:1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

283

2. Push the release lever (B) to disengagethe hook and push the wiper arm (A) outof the blade (C).

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the release leverclick into place.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saturn Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 225.


284


• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 292.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

Notice: If your vehicle has P245/45R18 sizetires, they are classified as low-profiletires. Low-profile tires are more susceptibleto damage from road hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires. Tire and orwheel assembly damage can occur whencoming into contact with road hazards like,potholes or sharp edged objects or whensliding into a curb. Your Saturn Warranty doesnot cover this type of damage. Keep tiresset to the correct inflation pressure and whenpossible avoid contact with curbs, potholes,and other road hazards.

285

Winter TiresIf your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires,they are classified as low-profile performancetires. These tires are designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement. If you expect todrive on snow or ice covered roads often, youmay want to get winter tires for your vehicle.The low-profile performance tires may not offerthe traction you would like or the same levelof performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed forincreased traction on snow and ice coveredroads. With winter tires, there may be decreaseddry road traction, increased road noise andshorter tire tread life. After switching to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehicle handlingand braking.

See your retailer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 296.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread typeon all four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,load range, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

286

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The example below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particular tire’swidth, height, aspect ratio, construction type, andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

287

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 299.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

288

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theplies are laid at alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 292.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 225.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.

289

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 225.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 292 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 225.

290

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 296.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 299.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 225.

291

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), belowthe driver’s door latch. This label shows yourvehicle’s original equipment tires and the correctinflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 225. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort, never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

292

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may look properly inflated evenwhen they are under-inflated. Check the tire’sinflation pressure when the tires are cold.Cold means your vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until youreach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

293

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 296and Wheel Replacement on page 300 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 336.

When rotating Goodyear Eagle RSA P245/45R18non-directional tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Non-Directional Tires

294

If your vehicle has Goodyear Eagle F1-GS1P245/45R18 size tires, they are directionaltires and must roll in a certain direction for thebest overall performance. The direction is shownby an arrow on the tire sidewall. Becausethese tires are directional, they should be rotatedas shown here. These tires should only bemoved from front to rear and rear to front onthe same side of the vehicle.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 225 for an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label andits location on your vehicle. Make certain that allwheel nuts are properly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities and Specificationson page 331.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom places where the wheel attaches tothe vehicle. In an emergency, you can usea cloth or a paper towel to do this; but besure to use a scraper or wire brush later,if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

Directional Tires

295

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresSaturn has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,Saturn strongly recommends that you get tireswith the same TPC spec rating. This way, yourvehicle will continue to have tires that are designedto give the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 287 for additional information.

296

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires) the vehicle maynot handle properly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on yourvehicle’s wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires withthose that do not have a TPC spec number,make sure they are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type (radialand bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’soriginal tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s centerpillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 225, for more information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

297

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheels andtires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance torollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, tractioncontrol, and stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saturn specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aSaturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 296 andAccessories and Modifications on page 233 foradditional information.

298

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

299

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keepcoming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourretailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.

300

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew Saturn original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire clearance to the bodyand chassis.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

301

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, thewheel nuts might come loose and thewheel could fall off, causing a crash.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto become loose and even come off.This could lead to a crash. Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new Saturnoriginal equipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newSaturn original equipment wheel.

302

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used ona vehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash. Use another type oftraction device only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on your vehicleand tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage toyour vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust orremove the device if it is contacting yourvehicle, and do not spin your wheels.If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatYour vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is nospare tire, no tire changing equipment, andno place to store a tire.

It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. See Tires on page 284. If air goes outof a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.But, if you should ever have a blow out, here area few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blow out,remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

303

Get the vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level placeand stopping. Then do this:

1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 110.

2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has anautomatic transmission, set the parkingbrake firmly and put the shift lever inPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 87.If your vehicle has a manual transmission,move the shift lever to REVERSE (R) andset the parking brake firmly. See ParkingYour Vehicle (Manual Transmission) onpage 89 for additional information.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheelor has damaged sidewalls or large tears thatallow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 359.

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by anail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflatorkit may be used to repair the damaged tiretemporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant toseal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.

After repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,take your vehicle to an authorized Saturn retailerto have the tire inspected and repaired assoon as possible. The tire sealant is a temporaryrepair only. See Tire Inflator Kit on page 304.

Tire Inflator KitYour vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jackor spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealantand air at the same time to seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire. Be sure to readand follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.The kit includes the following:

304

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant CanisterC. Air Compressor

Accessory PlugD. On/Off Switch

E. Air Pressure GageF. Air Compressor

Inflator HoseG. Sealant

Filling Hose

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nailor other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit maybe used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.

After temporarily repairing a tire using the tireinflator kit, it is recommended to take yourvehicle to an authorized Saturn retailer within100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving to have thetire inspected and repaired. If the sealant isnot removed from the tire within 100 miles(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likely that thetire may get damaged and have to be replaced.

305

Accessing the Tire Inflator KitTo access the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Make sure the convertible top is in the upposition before accessing the tire inflator kit.

2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68 formore information.

3. Locate the tire inflator kit on the driver’sside of the vehicle, near the back corner ofthe trunk.

4. Remove the tireinflator kit strapby squeezingthe two tabs ofthe quick releasebuckle.

5. Remove the inflator kit from its foam container.

306

Tire SealantThe kit contains a liquid sealant that when injectedinto a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holesor cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealantcannot repair tire damage caused while drivingon a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” ora tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.The tire sealant solution is to be used for a singletire and can only be used once.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on thesealant canister. The sealant may not beas effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,see your retailer for a replacement canister.

Using the Tire Inflator KitTo use the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrapthe sealant filling hose from the compressor.

2. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the unit. To do this, pull the top portionof the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert theplug into an accessory outlet yet.

3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tireby turning it counterclockwise.If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated thetire, do not remove it.

307

4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tirevalve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) isin the O (off) position.

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121for more information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engineon page 80 for more information. Thevehicle must be running while using theair compressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

308

7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on)position.The inflator kit will force sealant and air intothe tire. Sealant may leak from the puncturehole until the vehicle is driven and the holehas sealed.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and thesealant filling hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running,the connection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the sealantfilling hose and the tire valve stem.

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure, found on the Tire andLoading Information label located onthe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below thevehicle’s door latch, using the air pressuregage on the top of the unit.The pressure gage reading is slightly highwhile the compressor is on. Turn thecompressor off to get an accurate pressurereading.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannotbe reached after 15 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. Damage to thetire is severe and the sealant will not beeffective. Remove the air compressor plugfrom the accessory power outlet and unscrewthe inflating hose from the tire valve. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 359.

10. Push the inflator kit switch to the O (off)position once the correct tire pressure isobtained.

11. Turn off the engine.

12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plugfrom the accessory power outlet in thevehicle.

13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from thetire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,and replace the tire valve stem cap.Be careful when handling the tire inflatorcomponents as they may be hot after usage.

14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

309

15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug backin the air compressor. To do this, wrap theair compressor accessory plug, snap inthe plug, and then push in the bottom andthen the top of the wrapped air compressoraccessory plug.

16. If the flat tire wasable to inflate tothe recommendedinflation pressure,remove themaximum speedlabel from thesealant canister.

Place it in a highly visible location such asthe inside of the upper left corner of thewindshield or to the face of the radio/clock.The maximum speed label reminds youto drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tireinspected and repaired.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury.In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Storethe tire inflator kit in the proper place.

17. Return the equipment to the proper storagelocation in the trunk of your vehicle. You mayneed to loosen the retention strap to wrapit around the inflator kit and foam container.To do this, pull apart the strap and loosenthe strap at the quick release buckle.Then snap the buckle together, pull the straptight, and secure the loose end of the strapby mating the ends.

310

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.Stop at a safe location and check thetire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”next in this section. If the tire pressurehas fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), belowthe recommended inflation pressure, stopdriving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged forthe sealant to work. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 359.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, you can inflate the tire backup to the recommended inflation pressure.

19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a localretailer or in accordance with your localstate codes and practices.After using the sealant canister, replace itwith a new canister from a retailer.

20. After temporarily repairing a tire with theemergency flat tire repair kit, take yourvehicle to an authorized retailer to havethe tire inspected and repaired.

Using the Air Compressor withoutSealantTo use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,do the following:

1. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the air compressor.

2. Unlock the air compressor hose from thesealant canister by pulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose fromthe sealant canister.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose ontothe tire valve stem and push the lever downto secure in place.

311

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug intoan accessory power outlet in the vehicle. SeeAccessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engineon page 80 for more information. Thevehicle must be running while using theair compressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and the aircompressor hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running, theconnection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the aircompressor hose and the tire valve stem.

312

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure using the air pressure gageon the top of the unit.

10. Turn off the air compressor by moving theswitch to the O (off) position.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose andwrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.

12. Place the equipment in the original location inthe trunk of your vehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant CanisterTo remove the sealant canister, do the following:

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose fromthe sealant canister by pulling the lever up.

2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hosefrom the sealant canister.

3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from thecompressor.

313

4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator fillinghose is aligned with the slot in thecompressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressorand replace with a new sealant canister.See your retailer for more information.

To install a new sealant canister, do the following:

1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slotin the air compressor.

2. Push the sealant canister down and turnit clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around theair compressor channel to stow it in itsoriginal location.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose ontothe sealant canister inlet and push thelever down.

314

Appearance CareCleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they werenot intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your retailer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

315

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

316

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never usesteam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters orspot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are sold to

preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

317

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 345.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.You can get approved cleaning products from yourretailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materialson page 323. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois oran all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter your vehicle.

318

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 318.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your Saturn retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 323.

Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made fora basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keep thepaint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle ina garage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not formwhen it is rinsed with water.

319

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Convertible TopThe vehicle’s convertible top should be cleanedoften. However, high pressure car washesmay cause water to enter your vehicle.

When you hand wash the top, do it in partialshade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and asoft sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint onthe top, and a brush can chafe the threads inthe top fabric. Do not use detergents, harshcleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.

Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenlyto avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on thefabric for a few minutes. When the top is reallydirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughlyrinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dryin direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:

• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the topis completely dry before you lower it.

• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’spainted finish; it could leave streaks.

• If you decide to go through an automatic carwash, ask the manager if the equipmentcould damage your top.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may be equipped with eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlySaturn-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

320

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

321

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratchesin the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repairedwith touch-up materials available from yourSaturn retailer. Larger areas of finish damagecan be corrected in your Saturn retailer’s bodyand paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody.If these are not removed, corrosion and rustcan develop on the underbody parts such asfuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust systemeven though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed inclose areas of the frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your Saturn retailer or an underbodycar washing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,Saturn will repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged bythis fallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

322

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Convertible Top Cleaner Cleans convertible tops.

Convertible Top Protector Protects convertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Sprayon wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

323

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

324

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 54.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses.An electrical overload will cause the lamps toremain off. If this happens, have your headlampwiring checked right away.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixedor goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace thefuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and donot have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without – like theradio or cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is thecorrect amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

325

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle under the carpet.

Remove the fuse block cover to access thefuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.

After re-installing the fuse block cover, be sure totuck the carpet under the heater floor outlets.

Fuses Usage

1 Fuse Puller

2 Empty

3 Empty

4 Empty

5 Empty

326

Fuses Usage

6 Amplifier

7 Cluster

8 Ignition Switch, PassKey III+

9 Stoplamp

10 Climate Control System,PassKey III+

11 Empty

12 Spare

13 Airbag

14 Spare

15 Wiper

16

Climate Control System,Automatic Occupant SensingModule, Clutch Switch, CrankRelay, Instrument Panel Cluster

17 Empty

18 Empty

Fuses Usage

19 Electric Power Steering,Steering Wheel Controls

20 Spare

21 Spare

22 Empty

23 Radio

24 Sensing and Diagnostic Module

25 Engine Control Module,Transmission Control Module

26 Door Locks

27 Interior Lamps

28 Steering Wheel Control Backlighting

29 Power Windows

30 Climate Control System

31 Empty

32 Retained Accessory Power

327

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse block.

To remove fuses, use the fuse puller, or hold theend of the fuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 242for more information on location.

Fuses Usage

1 Empty (LE5); Cooling Fan (LNF)

2 Rear Window Defogger

3 Empty

4 Body Control Module 3

5 Crank

6 Body Control Module 2

7 Body Control Module

8 Cooling Fan 2 (LE5); Empty (LNF)

9 Empty

328

Fuses Usage

10 Trunk

11 Trunk

12 Empty

13 Fuel Pump

14 Rear Defogger Relay

15 Air Conditioning Clutch Relay

16 Empty

17 Empty

18 Trunk Release Relay

19 Fuel Pump Relay

20 Empty

21 Mirrors

22 Air Conditioning

23 Empty

24 Cooling Fan 2 Relay (LE5);Empty (LNF)

25 Fuse Puller

26 Powertrain Relay

27 Empty

Fuses Usage

28Back-up Lamps Relay(Automatic Transmission);Empty (Manual Transmission)

29 Data Link Connector

30 Outlet

31Back-up Lamps(Automatic Transmission);Empty (Manual Transmission)

32 Empty (LE5); Vacuum Pump (LNF)

33 Emissions

34 Crank Relay

35 Empty

36 Empty

37 Power Seat

38 Empty (LE5); Vacuum PumpRelay (LNF)

39 Empty

40 Cooling Fan 1 (LE5); Empty (LNF)

41 Empty (LE5); Turbo, CamPhaser (LNF)

42 Engine Control Module

329

Fuses Usage

43 Engine Control Module,Transmission

44 Anti-lock Brake System

45 Injectors, Ignition Coils (LE5);Ignition Coils (LNF)

46Back-up Lamps(Manual Transmission);Empty (Automatic Transmission)

47 Empty

48 Daytime Running Lamps Relay

49 Daytime Running Lamps

50 Cooling Fan 1 Relay (LE5);Empty (LNF)

51 Run/Crank Relay

52 Windshield Wiper Low/High Relay

53 Fog Lamps

54 Fog Lamps Relay

55 Horn Relay

56 S Band, OnStar®, RemoteKeyless Entry System

Fuses Usage


58 Wiper Diode

59 Windshield Wiper

60 Horn


62 Instrument Panel Ignition

63 Driver’s Side High Beam

64 Canister Vent

65 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

66 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

67 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

68 Parking Lamps Relay

69 Parking Lamps

70 Windshield Wiper On/Off Relay

71 Low-Beam Headlamp Relay

72 High-Beam Headlamp Relay

330

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer toRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 345 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerantcharge amount, see the refrigerant caution

label located under the hood.See your retailer for more information.

Cooling System

2.0L L4 Engine Automatic 8.9 qt 8.4 L

2.0L L4 Engine Manual 9.0 qt 8.6 L

2.4L L4 Engine Automatic 8.5 qt 8.0 L

2.4L L4 Engine Manual 8.7 qt 8.2 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L L4 and 2.4L L4 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Fuel Tank 13.6 gal 51.5 L

331

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Transmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill) 9.0 qt 8.5 L

Transmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill) 2.75 qt 2.6 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 X AutomaticManual 0.035 inch (0.9mm)

2.4L L4 B AutomaticManual 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)

332

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 334Introduction ............................................... 334Maintenance Requirements ........................ 334Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 334Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 334Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 336Additional Required Services ..................... 338Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 339

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 340At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 341At Least Once a Month ............................. 341At Least Once a Year ............................... 342Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 345Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 347Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 348Maintenance Record .................................. 349

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

333

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance may not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at Saturn want to help you keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week. Or youmay drive long distances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in makingdeliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to doerrands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your Saturn retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 235.

334

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 336 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 338and Maintenance Footnotes on page 339 forfurther information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your retailer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 234.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you shouldhave your Saturn retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your Saturn retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that Saturn-trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine Saturn parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 369.

Owner Checks and Services on page 340 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 345 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 347.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine Saturn parts.

335

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message on theDriver Information Center (DIC) comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 147.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may not indicatethat vehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your Saturn retailer hasSaturn-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine Saturn partsand reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 250 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

336

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 245. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 250. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 252. See footnote (h). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 294 and At Least Once a Month on page 341. • •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. Add fluid as needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

337

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 252. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (k). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (g).

•

338

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drum brakelinings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for thebody doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glovebox door, and console door. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(h) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

339

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour retailer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 255 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(k) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or

delivery service.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 345.

340

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 245 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep your engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to your enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 255 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires for wearand make sure they are inflated to the correctpressures. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 292.

341

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 86.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles,try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts inany other position, contact your Saturnretailer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, contact yourSaturn retailer for service.

342

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 86.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P),contact your Saturn retailer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transmission, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

343

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

344

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(2.4L L4engine)

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 245.


Engine Oil(2.0L L4engine)

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified with theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. However, not allsynthetic API oils with the starburstsymbol will meet this GM standard.You should look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM StandardGM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oilmeets all the requirements for yourvehicle. For the proper viscosity,see Engine Oil on page 245.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 255.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

HydraulicClutch System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

345


WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115. Witha complete drain and refill add4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-SlipAxle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,in Canada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 278.


ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

346

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour retailer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15287103 A3076C

2.0L and 2.4L Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Spark Plugs

2.0L L4 Engine 12590701 41-102

2.4L L4 Engine 12598004 41-103

Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)

Driver’s Side — 16 inches (40 cm) 10344209 —

Passenger’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm) 10344210 —

347

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines

348

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 334.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 340 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

349

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



350




351




352

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 354Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 354Online Owner Center ................................. 357Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 358Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 358GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 359Roadside Assistance Program ................... 359Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 363Collision Damage Repair ........................... 364

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 368Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 368Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 368Reporting Safety Defects to

Saturn .................................................... 369Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 369

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

353

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your retailer and to Saturn. Together we arecommitted to providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during and after thepurchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.Normally, any concerns with the sales transactionor the operation of your vehicle will be resolvedby your retailer’s sales or service departments.If, for any reason, your ownership experiencefalls below your expectations, we suggest youtake the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail CustomerAssistance Liaison. Any member of the retailmanagement team has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns. Normally,concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additionalassistance, in the U.S., contact the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact theSaturn Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter team member will handle your calland assist in providing product and warrantyinformation, the nearest retailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literature and discussany concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free numberin order to give your inquiry prompt attention.Please have the following information available togive the Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digitnumber can be found on the vehicleregistration or title, on the upper driver’s sidecorner of the dash, or on your roadsideassistance key card.

• The name of your selling and servicingretail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

354

When contacting Saturn, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn andits retailers are committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, Saturn and its retailersoffer the additional assistance of a neutralparty through our voluntary participation in amediation/arbitration program called BBBAuto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This programis available at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filinga court action, use of the program is free of chargeand your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decisiongiven in your case, you may reject it and proceedwith any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programby using the toll-free telephone number orby writing them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors.Saturn Corporation reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

355

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, from the time you fileyour complaint to the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, oryou may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

356

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

357

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)equipment in its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customerwho has access to a TDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY usersin Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

358

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for your vehicle suchas hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Center at1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call theSaturn Customer Communication Centreat 1-800-263-1999. TTY users inCanada may call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S. call1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada call1-800-268-6800.

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle,you are automatically enrolled in the SaturnRoadside Assistance Program. This value-addedservice is intended to provide you with peaceof mind as you drive in the city or travel theopen road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

359

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period andin Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel maybe restricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out serviceis provided. Lock-out service will be coveredat no charge if you are unable to gainentry into your vehicle. If you vehicle will notstart, Roadside Assistance will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizedretailer. In the U.S., replacement keys madeat the customer’s expense will be deliveredwithin 10 miles.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturnretailer for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance provided when the vehicle is miredin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetime, installation of that tire, in good condition,will be covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacementof the tire if not covered by a warrantablefailure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be coveredat no charge.

360

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),

and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times whenRoadside Assistance cannot provide timelyassistance, your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and youwill be reimbursed up to $100 upon submissionof the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty for U.S. customers, and the durationof the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadiancustomers of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.However, any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are the responsibility ofthe driver.

361

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representatives:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember we are onlya phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000; text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Saturn and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains or other traction devices.

362

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle useson-board vehicle computers to monitor emissioncontrol components to optimize fuel economy,to monitor conditions for airbag deploymentand, if the vehicle has the Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS), to provide anti-lock braking andto help the driver control the vehicle in difficultdriving situations. Some information may be storedduring regular operations to facilitate repair ofdetected malfunctions; other information is storedonly in a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety

belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. This informationhas been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of policeor similar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

363

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can readthe information if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

364

A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

365

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 359 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.

366

In some states/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.This is especially true if there are no injuriesand both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a Saturnretailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that

any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new Genuine GMparts or recycled original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered by yourGM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but youmust live with the repair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurance company may initiallyvalue the repair using aftermarket parts. Discussthis with your repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, evenif your insurance coverage does not pay thefull cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

367

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer orSaturn Corporation.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

368

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainlyhope you’ll notify us.

U.S. customers can call the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-553-6000,or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24

Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.Or, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsA variety of publications are available to you.Saturn service manuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases, specializedtools and equipment are necessary to completecertain repairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who either have the training,or wish to gain a greater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information or toorder publications in the United States,call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals areavailable by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

369

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletinsand as described below is applicable only inthe fifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia,and only for cars and light trucks with aGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) lessthan 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies ofindividual bulletins are also at your participatingSaturn retailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitorsproduct performance in the field. We then preparebulletins for servicing our products better. Youcan get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertainto the proper use and care of your vehicle.Some describe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time withthe latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repaira new or unexpected condition. Others describea quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can helpa technician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting asmall number of vehicles. Your Saturn retaileror a qualified technician may have to determineif a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.To order Saturn bulletins, call SaturnPublications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order online.

370

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 233Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 121Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 55Additives, Fuel ............................................ 236Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 325Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 252Air Conditioning ........................................... 122Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 131Readiness Light ....................................... 130

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 363

Airbag System ............................................... 43Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 55How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 48Passenger Sensing System ....................... 50Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 54What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 48What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 48When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 47Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 45

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 190Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 190Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 197Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 135Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 320Care of Safety Belts ................................ 318Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 322Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 319Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 315Convertible Top ........................................ 320Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 316Finish Care .............................................. 319Finish Damage ......................................... 322Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 317Leather .................................................... 317Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 321Tires ........................................................ 321Underbody Maintenance ........................... 322Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 323Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 318Weatherstrips ........................................... 318Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 319

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 122

371

Audio System(s) .......................................... 158Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 188Care of Your CD Player ........................... 190Care of Your CDs .................................... 190Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 190Radio with CD ................................ 162, 168Setting the Time .............................. 159, 160Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 188Understanding Radio Reception ............... 189XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 190

Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 68Automatic Door Unlock .................................. 68Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 254Operation ................................................... 82

BBattery ........................................................ 271

Run-Down Protection ............................... 121Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 215Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 197Emergencies ............................................ 199Parking ...................................................... 86System Warning Light .............................. 134

Brakes ........................................................ 268Braking ....................................................... 196Braking in Emergencies ............................... 199Break-In, New Vehicle ................................... 77Bulb Replacement ....................................... 279

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 282Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog

Lamps .................................................. 280Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 279Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 278Headlamps and Parking Lamps ................ 279License Plate Lamps ................................ 282Replacement Bulbs .................................. 283Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................ 281Buying New Tires ........................................ 296

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 236California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 234Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 331Carbon Monoxide ................. 68, 91, 218, 230

372

Care ofSafety Belts ............................................. 318Your CD Player ........................................ 190Your CDs ................................................. 190

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 179Center Console Storage Area ...................... 100Chains, Tire ................................................. 303Charging System Light ................................ 133Check

Engine Light ............................................ 138Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 240Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 322Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 34Infants and Young Children ........................ 30Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 38Older Children ........................................... 28Securing a Child Restraint in the

Passenger Seat Position ......................... 38Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 122Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 320Convertible Top ........................................ 320

Cleaning (cont.)Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 319Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 316Finish Care .............................................. 319Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 315Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 317Leather .................................................... 317Tires ........................................................ 321Underbody Maintenance ........................... 322Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 318Weatherstrips ........................................... 318Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 319

Climate Control System ............................... 122Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 126

Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 254Collision Damage Repair ............................. 364Content Theft-Deterrent ................................. 73Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 196Convertible Top ........................................... 100Coolant

Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 137Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 258

373

Cooling System ........................................... 260Cruise Control ............................................. 115Cupholder(s) ................................................. 99Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 358

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 358Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 354GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 359Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 369Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 368Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 368Roadside Assistance Program .................. 359Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 369

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 119Defensive Driving ........................................ 192Delayed Locking ............................................ 67Disc, MP3 ................................................... 179Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 234

DoorAutomatic Door Lock ................................. 68Automatic Door Unlock .............................. 68Delayed Locking ........................................ 67Manual Door Locks .................................... 66Power Door Locks ..................................... 67

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 18Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 144DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 144DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 152DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 147

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 209City .......................................................... 213Defensive ................................................. 192Drunken ................................................... 193Freeway ................................................... 214Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 216In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 210Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 225Winter ...................................................... 218

374

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 325Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 326Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 325Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 325Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 325Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 328

Electronic Stability Control ........................... 201Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light .... 136Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 252Battery ..................................................... 271Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 138Coolant .................................................... 255Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 137Drive Belt Routing .................................... 348Engine Compartment Overview ................ 242Exhaust ..................................................... 91Oil ........................................................... 245Oil Life System ........................................ 250

Engine (cont.)Overheating ............................................. 258Starting ...................................................... 80

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 120Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 363Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 27

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 252Finish Damage ............................................ 322Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 190Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 110Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 112Flat Tire ...................................................... 303Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 254Manual Transmission ................................ 254Power Steering ........................................ 266Windshield Washer .................................. 267

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 142Fog Lamps .................................................. 120

375

Fuel ............................................................ 235Additives .................................................. 236California Fuel .......................................... 236Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 240Filling Your Tank ...................................... 238Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 237Gage ....................................................... 143Gasoline Octane ...................................... 235Gasoline Specifications ............................ 236Low Warning Light ................................... 143

FusesFloor Console Fuse Block ........................ 326Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 325Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 328

GGage

Fuel ......................................................... 143Speedometer ........................................... 129Tachometer .............................................. 129

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 235Specifications ........................................... 236

Glove Box ..................................................... 99GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 359

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 110Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 278Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 325Headlamps .................................................. 118

Bulb Replacement .................................... 279Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 119Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 112Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog

Lamps .................................................. 280Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 279Headlamps and Parking Lamps ................ 279High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 112On Reminder ........................................... 119

Heater ......................................................... 122Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 142Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 216Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 216

376

HoodChecking Things Under ............................ 240Release ................................................... 241

Horn ............................................................ 110How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 18Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 254

IIgnition Positions ........................................... 78Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 30Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 292Inflator Kit, Tire ........................................... 304Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 108Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 120Cluster ..................................................... 128

JJump Starting .............................................. 272

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 62Keys ............................................................. 60

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 287Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 121Fog .......................................................... 120Mirror Reading ......................................... 120

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 38

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 12License Plate Lamps ................................... 282Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 130Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 135Brake System Warning ............................. 134Charging System ..................................... 133Electronic Stability Control ........................ 136Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 137Fog Lamp ................................................ 142

377

Light (cont.)Highbeam On .......................................... 142Low Fuel Warning .................................... 143Malfunction Indicator ................................ 138Oil Pressure ............................................. 141Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 131Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 130Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 129Security ................................................... 142Traction Control System ........................... 136Trunk Ajar ................................................ 142

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................. 120

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 200Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 225Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................. 68Automatic Door Unlock .............................. 68Delayed Locking ........................................ 67Manual Door .............................................. 66Power Door ............................................... 67

Loss of Control ........................................... 208Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 143

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 338At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 341At Least Once a Month ............................ 341At Least Once a Year .............................. 342Introduction .............................................. 334Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 339Maintenance Record ................................ 349Maintenance Requirements ...................... 334Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 347Owner Checks and Services .................... 340Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 345Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 336Using ....................................................... 334Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 334

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 138Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 254Operation ................................................... 85

378

MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ................... 147

Mirror Reading Lamps ................................. 120Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 93Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........ 93Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 93

MP3 ............................................................ 179MyGMLink.com ............................................ 357

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................... 77Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 347

OOdometer .................................................... 129Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 206Oil

Engine ..................................................... 245Pressure Light .......................................... 141

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 250Older Children, Restraints ............................. 28Online Owner Center ................................... 357OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual .......... 94Other Warning Devices ................................ 110Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 126Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 121Outside

Power Mirrors ............................................ 93Owner Checks and Services ....................... 340Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 322Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................... 87Shifting Out of ........................................... 89

ParkingBrake ......................................................... 86Over Things That Burn .............................. 90

Parking Your Vehicle ..................................... 89

379

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 131Passenger Position, Safety Belts ................... 27Passenger Sensing System ........................... 50Passing ....................................................... 206PASS-Key® III+ ............................................. 75PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 75Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 121Door Locks ................................................ 67Electrical System ..................................... 325Retained Accessory (RAP) ......................... 79Steering Fluid .......................................... 266Windows .................................................... 72

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 27

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 17

RRadios ........................................................ 158

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 190Care of Your CDs .................................... 190

Radios (cont.)Radio with CD ................................ 162, 168Setting the Time .............................. 159, 160Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 188Understanding Reception ......................... 189

Rear Axle .................................................... 278Limited-Slip .............................................. 200

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................ 93Rearview Mirrors ........................................... 93Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 345Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 230Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 62Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 63Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 283Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 368Saturn ...................................................... 369United States Government ....................... 368

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 56Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 57

380

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................. 79Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 359Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 225Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 348Running the Engine While Parked ................. 92

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 130Pretensioners ............................................. 27Reminder Light ........................................ 129

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 318Driver Position ........................................... 18How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 18Passenger Position .................................... 27Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ....................................................... 17Safety Belt Extender .................................. 27Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 26Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 12

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4

Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 336Seatback Latches .......................................... 12Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Manual ........................................................ 8Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10Seatback Latches ...................................... 12

Securing a Child RestraintPassenger Seat Position ............................ 38

Security Light .............................................. 142Service ........................................................ 233

Accessories and Modifications .................. 233Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 235California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 234Doing Your Own Work ............................. 234Engine Soon Light ................................... 138Publications Ordering Information ............. 369

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 54Setting the Time ................................. 159, 160Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 321Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 87Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 89Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 112

381

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 331Speedometer ............................................... 129Starting Your Engine ..................................... 80Steering ...................................................... 203Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 188Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 110Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 100Cupholder(s) .............................................. 99Glove Box ................................................. 99

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 224Sun Visors .................................................... 72

TTachometer ................................................. 129Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and SidemarkerLamps .................................................. 281

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 188Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................ 73

Content Theft-Deterrent .............................. 73PASS-Key® III+ .......................................... 75PASS-Key® III+ Operation .......................... 75

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 110Tires ........................................................... 284

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 320

Buying New Tires ..................................... 296Chains ..................................................... 303Cleaning .................................................. 321Different Size ........................................... 298If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 303Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 292Inspection and Rotation ............................ 294Tire Inflator Kit ......................................... 304Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 287Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 289Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 299Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 300Wheel Replacement ................................. 300When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 296Winter Tires ............................................. 286

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 230Towing a Trailer ....................................... 230Your Vehicle ............................................. 230

382

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 199Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 200

Traction Control System Warning Light ........ 136Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 254Fluid, Manual ........................................... 254

Transmission Operation, Automatic ................ 82Transmission Operation, Manual .................... 85Trunk ............................................................ 68Trunk Ajar Light ........................................... 142Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 112Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 111

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 189Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 299

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 196Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 225

Vehicle (cont.)Parking Your .............................................. 89Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 363

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 324Service Parts Identification Label .............. 324

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 152

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 126Visors ........................................................... 72

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 127Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 147Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 110Other Warning Devices ............................ 110Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 300Different Size ........................................... 298Replacement ............................................ 300

383

Windows ....................................................... 71Power ........................................................ 72

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 114Washer Fluid ........................................... 267Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 283Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 319Wipers ..................................................... 113

Winter Driving ............................................. 218Winter Tires ................................................. 286

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 186XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 190

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 334

384

2007 saturn sky owner manual m - general motorshow to use this manual many people read the owner...

Documents